all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 3.77 MiB | June 01 2003 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.07 MiB | May 03 2003 / March 03 2003 | |||
1 2 3 | External Photos | / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | March 03 2004 / May 03 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | March 03 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | March 03 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | January 05 2003 / March 03 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | May 03 2003 / March 03 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | March 03 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | October 01 2003 / June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | October 01 2003 / June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Operational Description | June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | October 01 2003 / June 01 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | / June 01 2003 |
1 2 3 | Manual | Users Manual | 3.77 MiB | June 01 2003 |
User Guide for the ORiNOCO AP-600 The Capacity to Do Great Things. Copyright 2002 Proxim Corporation. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634;
5,875,179; 6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. This users guide and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Corporation. Trademarks ORiNOCO is a registered trademark, and 2x, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are trademarks of Proxim Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. ORiNOCO AP-600 Users Guide Part # PX-024124-A Rev. 01 12_02 2 ORiNOCO AP-600 Users Guide Contents 1 Introduction . 10 Introducing the AP-600 . 10 Document Conventions . 10 The Product Package . 11 System Requirements . 11 IEEE 802.11 Specifications . 11 Wireless Networking Concepts . 12 Guidelines for Roaming . 12 Management and Monitoring Capabilities . 13 HTTP Interface . 13 Command Line Interface . 13 SNMP Management . 13 Wireless Network Manager . 14 Active Ethernet . 14 Software Features . 15 2 Installation & Basic Configuration . 17 Prerequisites . 17 Installation . 18 Initialization . 22 ScanTool . 22 ScanTool Instructions . 22 Setup Wizard . 24 Setup Wizard Instructions. 24 Download the Latest Software . 27 Setup your TFTP Server . 27 Download Updates from your TFTP Server using the Web Interface . 28 Download Updates from your TFTP Server using the CLI Interface . 28 Additional Hardware Features . 28 Mounting Options. 28 Desktop Mount . 28 Wall Mount . 28 Ceiling Mount . 30 Kensington Security Slot . 31 LED Indicators . 32 3 3 Status Information . 33 Logging into the HTTP Interface . 33 System Status . 34 4 Advanced Configuration . 35 Configuring the AP-600 Using the HTTP Interface . 35 System . 37 Network . 37 IP Configuration . 37 DHCP Server . 38 Link Integrity . 39 Interfaces . 40 Wireless (AP-600a) . 40 Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) . 41 RTS/CTS Medium Reservation . 42 Wireless (AP-600b) . 42 Distance Between APs . 44 Multicast Rate. 45 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) . 46 Ethernet . 47 Management . 48 Passwords . 48 IP Access Table . 48 Services . 49 Filtering . 50 Ethernet Protocol . 50 Static MAC . 51 Static MAC Filter Examples . 52 Advanced. 53 TCP/UDP Port . 54 Adding TCP/UDP Port Filters . 54 Editing TCP/UDP Port Filters . 54 Alarms . 55 Groups . 55 Alarm Host Table . 55 Syslog . 55 Setting Syslog Event Notifications . 55 Configuring Syslog Event Notifications. 56 4 Bridge . 57 Spanning Tree . 57 Storm Threshold . 57 Intra BSS . 57 Packet Forwarding. 58 Configuring Interfaces for Packet Forwarding . 58 Security . 58 MAC Access . 58 WEP Encryption. 59 802.1x . 60 Authentication Process. 61 Configuring Security Settings . 62 802.1x Security. 62 Mixed Mode (802.1x and WEP Encryption) . 63 RADIUS . 63 MAC Access Control Via RADIUS Authentication . 64 RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x . 65 RADIUS Accounting . 66 Session Length. 66 Configuring RADIUS Accounting . 66 5 Monitor Information . 68 Logging into the HTTP Interface . 68 Version . 69 ICMP . 70 IP/ARP Table . 71 Learn Table . 71 IAPP . 72 RADIUS . 72 Interfaces . 73 Link Test (AP-600b Only) . 74 6 Commands . 76 Logging into the HTTP Interface . 76 Download . 78 Upload . 78 Reboot . 79 Reset . 80 Help Link . 80 5 7 Troubleshooting. 81 Troubleshooting Concepts . 81 Symptoms and Solutions . 82 Connectivity Issues . 82 AP-600 Unit Will Not Boot - No LED Activity . 82 Serial Link Does Not Work . 82 Ethernet Link Does Not Work . 82 Basic Software Setup and Configuration Problems. 82 Lost AP-600, Telnet, or SNMP Password. 82 Client Computer Cannot Connect. 82 AP-600 Has Incorrect IP Address. 82 HTTP (browser) or Telnet Interface Does Not Work . 83 HTML Help Files Do Not Appear . 83 Telnet CLI Does Not Work . 83 TFTP Server Does Not Work . 83 Client Connection Problems . 84 Client Software Finds No Connection. 84 Client PC Card Does Not Work . 84 Intermittent Loss of Connection . 84 Client Does Not Receive an IP Address - Cannot Connect to Internet . 84 Active Ethernet (AE) . 84 The AP-600 Does Not Work . 84 There Is No Data Link. 84 Overload Indications . 84 Recovery Procedures . 85 Reset to Factory Default Procedure . 85 Forced Reload Procedure . 86 Download a New Image Using ScanTool . 86 Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI . 87 Setting IP Address using Serial Port and Normal CLI . 88 Hardware and Software Requirements. 88 Attaching the Serial Port Cable. 88 Initializing the IP Address using CLI . 88 System Alarms (Traps) . 90 Security Alarms . 90 Wireless Interface Card Alarms . 90 Operational Alarms . 90 FLASH Memory Alarms . 90 TFTP Alarms . 90 Image Alarms. 90 Standard MIB-II (RFC 1213) Alarms . 90 Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) Alarms . 90 6 Related Applications . 91 RADIUS Authentication Server . 91 TFTP Server . 91 A Command Line Interface (CLI) . 92 General Notes . 92 Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge . 92 Notation Conventions . 92 Important Terminology . 92 Navigation and Special Keys . 93 CLI Error Messages. 93 Command Line Interface (CLI) Variations . 93 Bootloader CLI. 94 CLI Command Types . 95 Operational CLI Commands . 95
? (List Commands) . 95 done, exit, quit . 97 download . 97 help. 97 history . 98 passwd . 98 reboot . 98 search. 98 upload. 99 Parameter Control Commands . 99 show CLI Command. 99 set CLI Command . 99 Configuring Objects that Require Reboot . 99 set and show Command Examples . 100 Using Tables & User Strings . 102 Working with Tables. 102 Using Strings . 102 Configuring the AP-600 using CLI commands . 103 Log into the AP-600 using HyperTerminal . 103 Log into the AP-600 using Telnet. 103 Set Basic Configuration Parameters using CLI Commands . 103 Set System Name, Location and Contact Information . 103 Set Static IP Address for the AP-600 . 104 Change Passwords . 104 Set Network Names for the Wireless Interface. 104 Set WEP Encryption for the Wireless Interface . 105 Download an AP-600 Configuration File from your TFTP Server. 105 Backup your AP-600 Configuration File . 105 7 Other Network Settings . 106 Configure the AP-600 as a DHCP Server . 106 Configure the DNS Client . 106 Maintain Client Connections using Link Integrity . 107 Change your Wireless Interface Settings . 107 Set Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode . 108 Set Interface Management Services . 108 Configure Syslog . 109 Configure Intra BSS . 109 Configure MAC Access Control . 109 Configure 802.1x Authentication . 110 Set RADIUS Parameters . 110 CLI Monitoring Parameters . 111 Parameter Tables . 112 System Parameters . 113 Inventory Management Information . 113 Network Parameters . 113 IP Configuration Parameters . 113 DHCP Server Parameters . 114 Link Integrity Parameters . 115 Interface Parameters . 115 Wireless Interface Parameters . 115 Ethernet Interface Parameters . 117 Management Parameters . 118 SNMP Parameters . 118 HTTP (web browser) Parameters. 118 Telnet Parameters . 118 Serial Port Parameters . 119 TFTP Server Parameters . 119 IP Access Table Parameters . 119 Filtering Parameters . 119 Ethernet Protocol Filtering Parameters . 119 Static MAC Address Filter Table . 120 Proxy ARP Parameters . 120 IP ARP Filtering Parameters . 120 Broadcast Filtering Table . 121 TCP/UDP Port Filtering . 121 Alarms Parameters . 122 SNMP Table Host Table Parameters . 122 Syslog Parameters . 122 8 Bridge Parameters. 123 Spanning Tree Parameters. 123 Storm Threshold Parameters . 123 Intra BSS Subscriber Blocking . 124 Packet Forwarding Parameters . 124 Security Parameters . 124 Wireless Interface Security Parameters . 124 MAC Access Control Parameter. 125 RADIUS Parameters . 125 Primary and Backup RADIUS Server Table Parameters . 125 Other Parameters . 127 IAPP Parameters . 127 SpectraLink VoIP Parameters (AP-600b Only). 127 B ASCII Character Chart . 128 C Specifications. 129 Hardware Specifications . 129 Physical Specifications . 129 Electrical Specifications . 129 Environmental Specifications . 129 Ethernet Interface . 129 Serial Port Interface . 129 Active Ethernet Interface . 130 HTTP Interface . 130 Radio Specifications . 130 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a. 130 FCC (U.S., Canada, Australia) . 130 ETSI (Europe). 130 Japan (MKK). 131 Singapore . 131 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b. 131 Wireless Communication Range . 132 D Technical Support . 133 9 Introduction In This Chapter 1 Introducing the AP-600 The Product Package System Requirements IEEE 802.11 Specifications
Wireless Networking Concepts
Management and Monitoring Capabilities
Active Ethernet Software Features Introducing the AP-600 The AP-600 is a high performance wireless Access Point that includes an integrated antenna and radio. The AP-600 comes in two models: AP-600a, which complies with the IEEE 802.11a wireless standard, and AP-600b, which complies with the IEEE 802.11b wireless standard (see IEEE 802.11 Specifications for details). Both models provide mobile clients with wireless access to a network infrastructure. Proxim is a leading manufacturer of wireless networking equipment. Proxims unmatched expertise in radio networking technology, combined with the companys extensive experience serving the communication needs of the mobile computing user, have kept Proxim at the forefront of the wireless Local Area Networking (LAN) market. Document Conventions
The term, AP-600, is used to describe features that are available with both the AP-600a and the AP-600b. The term, 802.11, is used to describe features that apply to both the 802.11a and 802.11b standards. Blue text indicates a link to a topic or Web address. If you are viewing this documentation on your computer, click the blue text to jump to the linked item. 127(127(127(127(
A Note indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 A Caution indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. 10 Introduction The Product Package Each AP-600 comes with the following:
One metal base for ceiling or desktop mounting (includes two screws)
Mounting hardware Four 3.5 mm x 40 mm screws Four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs
One power supply
One ORiNOCO Installation CD-ROM that contains the following:
Software Installation Wizard ScanTool Solarwinds TFTP software HTML Help this users guide in PDF format
One AP-600 Quick Start Guide If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your reseller or ORiNOCO Technical Support (see Technical Support for contact information). System Requirements To begin using an AP-600, you must have the following minimum requirements:
An 802.11a client device if you have an AP-600a An 802.11b client device if you have an AP-600b A 10Base-T Ethernet or 100Base-TX Fast Ethernet switch or hub At least one of the following IEEE 802.11-compliant devices:
A computer that is connected to the same IP network as the AP-600 and has one of the following Web browsers installed:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (recommended)
(The computer is required to configure the AP-600 using the HTTP interface.) Netscape 4.x or later
IEEE 802.11 Specifications In 1997, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) adopted the 802.11 standard for wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This standard includes provisions for three radio technologies: direct sequence spread spectrum, frequency hopping spread spectrum, and infrared. Devices that comply with the 802.11 standard operate at a data rate of either 1 or 2 Megabits per second (Mbits/sec). In 1999, the IEEE modified the 802.11 standard to support direct sequence devices that can operate at speeds of up to 11 Mbits/sec. The IEEE ratified this standard as 802.11b. 802.11b devices are backwards compatible with 2.4 GHz 802.11 direct sequence devices (that operate at 1 or 2 Mbits/sec). The AP-600b complies with the IEEE 802.11b standard. Also in 1999, the IEEE modified the 802.11 standard to support devices operating in the 5 GHz frequency band. This standard is referred to as 802.11a. 802.11a devices are not compatible with 2.4 GHz 802.11 or 802.11b devices. 802.11a radios use a radio technology called Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) to achieve data rates of up to 54 Mbits/sec. In addition, Proxims 802.11a products support an extension of the 802.11a standard, known as 2XTM Turbo mode. 2X Turbo mode is not part of the 802.11a standard (so devices using this mode from different vendors may not necessarily be interoperable with each other) but it allows data rates of up to 108 Mbits/sec. The AP-600a complies with the IEEE 802.11a standard. 127(127(127(127(
With the exception of the radio configuration settings, all of the information in this user guide applies to both models, unless otherwise noted. 11 Introduction Wireless Networking Concepts The AP-600 extends the capability of an existing Ethernet network to devices on a wireless network. Wireless devices can connect to a single Access Point, or they can move between multiple Access Points located within the same vicinity. As wireless clients move from one coverage cell to another, they maintain network connectivity. To determine the best location for an Access Point, Proxim recommends conducting a Site Survey before placing the device in its final location. For information about how to conduct a Site Survey, contact your local reseller. Before an Access Point can be configured for your specific networking requirements, it must first be initialized. See Installation & Basic Configuration for details. Figure 1-1 Typical wireless network access infrastructure Once initialized, the network administrator can configure each unit according to the networks requirements. The AP-600 functions as a wireless network access point to data networks. An AP-600 network provides:
Seamless client roaming
Easy installation and operation
Over-the-air encryption of data
High speed network links Guidelines for Roaming
An AP-600 can only communicate with client devices that support its wireless standard. For example, an 802.11a client cannot communicate with an AP-600b and an 802.11b client cannot communicate with an AP-600a. Note that an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard can communicate with both the AP-600a and the AP-600b. All Access Points must have the same Network Name to support client roaming. All workstations with an 802.11 client adapter installed must use either a Network Name of any or the same Network Name as the Access Points that they will roam between. If an AP-600b has Closed System enabled, a client must have the same Network Name as the Access Point to communicate (see Wireless (AP-600b)). All Access Points and clients must have the same security settings to communicate. The Access Points cells must overlap to ensure that there are no gaps in coverage and to ensure that the roaming client will always have a connection available. The coverage area of an AP-600b is larger than the coverage area of an AP-600a. The AP-600b operates in the 2.4 GHz frequency band; the AP-600a operates in the 5 GHz band. Products that operate in the 2.4 GHz band offer greater range than products that operate in the 5 GHz band. An AP-600a operates at faster data rates than the AP-600b. 802.11a products like the AP-600a operate at speeds of up to 54 Mbits/sec (108 Mbits/sec in Turbo mode); 802.11b products like the AP-600b operate at speeds of up to 11 Mbits/sec. All Access Points in the same vicinity should use a unique, independent Channel. By default, the AP-600 automatically scans for available Channels during boot-up but you can also set the Channel manually (see Interfaces for details). Access Points that use the same Channel should be installed as far away from each other as possible to reduce potential interference. 12 Management and Monitoring Capabilities There are several management and monitoring interfaces available to the network administrator to configure and manage an AP-600 on the network:
Introduction HTTP Interface Command Line Interface SNMP Management
Wireless Network Manager HTTP Interface The HTTP Interface (Web browser Interface) provides easy access to configuration settings and network statistics from any computer on the network. You can access the HTTP Interface over your LAN (switch, hub, etc.), over the Internet, or with a crossover Ethernet cable connected directly to your computers Ethernet Port. Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based configuration utility that supports a set of keyboard commands and parameters to configure and manage an AP-600. Users enter Command Statements, composed of CLI Commands and their associated parameters. Statements may be issued from the keyboard for real time control, or from scripts that automate configuration. For example, when downloading a file, administrators enter the download CLI Command along with IP Address, file name, and file type parameters. You access the CLI over a HyperTerminal serial connection or via Telnet. During initial configuration, you can use the CLI over a serial port connection to configure an Access Points IP address. When accessing the CLI via Telnet, you can communicate with the Access Point from over your LAN (switch, hub, etc.), from over the Internet, or with a crossover Ethernet cable connected directly to your computers Ethernet Port. See Command Line Interface (CLI) for more information on the CLI and for a list of CLI commands and parameters. SNMP Management In addition to the HTTP and the CLI interfaces, you can also manage and configure an AP-600 using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Note that this requires an SNMP manager program, like HP Openview or Castlerocks SNMPc. The AP-600 supports several Management Information Base (MIB) files that describe the parameters that can be viewed and/or configured over SNMP:
MIB-II (RFC 1213) ORiNOCO Enterprise MIB Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) Ethernet-like MIB (RFC 1643) 802.11 MIB Proxim provides these MIB files on the CD included with each Access Point. You need to compile one or more of the above MIBs into your SNMP programs database before you can manage an Access Point using SNMP. Refer to the documentation that came with your SNMP manager for instructions on how to compile MIBs. The Enterprise MIB defines the read and read-write objects that can be viewed or configured using SNMP. These objects correspond to most of the settings and statistics that are available with the other management interfaces. Refer to the Enterprise MIB for more information; the MIB can be opened with any text editor, such as Microsoft Word, Notepad, or WordPad. 127(127(127(127(
The remainder of this guide describes how to configure an AP-600 using the HTTP Web interface or the CLI interface. For information on how to manage devices using SNMP, refer to the documentation that came with your SNMP program. Also, refer to the MIB files for information on the parameters available via SNMP. 13 Introduction Wireless Network Manager The Wireless Network Manager is Proxims premier management tool for Access Points and Outdoor Routers. It provides a single management interface that lets an IT manager configure, manage, upgrade, and troubleshoot thousands of wireless devices from anywhere in the world. The Wireless Network Manager simplifies network maintenance and easily integrates in an existing SNMP management system. See Proxims Web site at http://www.proxim.com for more information on the Wireless Network Manager. Active Ethernet The AP-600 is equipped with an 802.3af-compliant Active Ethernet module. Active Ethernet (AE) delivers both data and power to the access point over a single Ethernet cable. If you choose to use Active Ethernet, there is no difference in operation; the only difference is in the power source. The Active Ethernet (AE) integrated module receives ~48 VDC over a standard Category 5 Ethernet cable. To use Active Ethernet, you must have an AE hub (also known as a power injector) connected to the network. The cable length between the AE hub and the Access Point should not exceed 100 meters (approximately 325 feet). The AE hub is not a repeater and does not amplify the Ethernet data signal. If connected to an AE hub and an AC power simultaneously, the Access Point draws power from Active Ethernet. Maximum power supplied to an Access Point is 11 Watts; the unit typically draws approximately 10 Watts. Also see Electrical Specifications. 127(127(127(127(
The AP-600s 802.3af-compliant Active Ethernet module is backwards compatible with all ORiNOCO Active Ethernet hubs that do not support the IEEE 802.3af standard. 14 Software Features The table below compares the software features available for the AP-600a and the AP-600b:
Introduction AP-600a 802.11a up to 50 AP-600b 802.11b up to 250 Comments Feature Number of stations per Basic Service Set (BSS) HTTP Server Telnet / CLI SNMP Agent Emergency Reset to Default Configuration DHCP Client DHCP Server TFTP RADIUS Access Control Fallback to Primary RADIUS Server RADIUS Session Timeout RADIUS Multiple MAC Address Formats RADIUS DNS Host Name Support RADIUS Start/Stop Accounting 802.1x 802.1d bridging MAC Access Control Table Protocol Filtering Multicast/Broadcast Storm Filtering Proxy ARP ICMP Echo Response Hardware Watchdog Timer Roaming Link Integrity Automatic Channel Select WEP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes WEP Plus (Weak Key Avoidance) No Yes WDS Relay Remote Link Test Link Test Responder Medium Density Distribution Distance between APs Ultra High Density Closed System Interference Robustness Load Balancing SpectraLink VoIP Support Fragmentation Blocking Intra BSS Clients Packet Forwarding TCP/UDP Port Filtering Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) Per User Per Session Encryption Syslog Messaging 2X Turbo Mode No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes Yes Yes*
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Key lengths supported by AP-600b:
64-bit and 128-bit Key lengths supported by AP-600a:
64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit Available only one way (AP to client) if using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client. For AP-600b, Fragmentation is implemented as part of the Interference Robustness feature. DFS is required for 802.11a products sold in Europe Use in conjunction with 802.1x Not available in all countries
*This feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b. 15 The following table provides detailed information on the some of the differences between the 802.11a and 802.11b feature sets. Introduction Physical Layer Type
(Modulation Type) Auto Channel Select Frequency Channel Transmit Rate Distance Between APs Multicast Rate Interference Robustness Closed System Load Balancing Medium Density Distribution AP-600a
(802.11a) ODFM
(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Enable (default) Disable Note: A user cannot manually select a channel for products sold in Europe; these products require automatic channel selection using DFS. See Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). Available Channels vary by regulatory domain and/or country. See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a for details. 0 - Auto Fallback (default) 6 Mbits/sec 9 Mbits/sec 12 Mbits/sec 18 Mbits/sec 24 Mbits/sec 36 Mbits/sec 48 Mbits/sec 54 Mbits/sec For 2X Turbo mode (not available in all countries):
0 - Auto Fallback (default) 12 Mbits/sec 18 Mbits/sec 24 Mbits/sec 36 Mbits/sec 48 Mbits/sec 72 Mbits/sec 96 Mbits/sec 108 Mbits/sec N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A AP-600b
(802.11b) DSSS
(Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Enable (default) Disable Available Channels vary by regulatory domain and/or country. See 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b for details. N/A Large (default) Medium Small Minicell Microcell 1 Mbits/sec 2 Mbits/sec 5.5 Mbits/sec 11 Mbits/sec Available options depend on Distance Between APs setting Enable (default) Disable Enable Disable (default) Enable (default) Disable Enable (default) Disable 16 2 Installation & Basic Configuration In This Chapter Prerequisites Installation Initialization This chapter describes how to install and configure an AP-600 for the first time.
Download the Latest Software
Additional Hardware Features Prerequisites Before installing an AP-600, you need to gather certain network information. The following section identifies the information you need. Network Name (SSID of the wireless cards) You must assign the Access Point a Network Name before wireless users can communicate with it. The clients also need the same Network Name. This is not the same as the System Name, which applies only to the Access Point. The network administrator typically provides the Network Name. AP-600s IP Address If you do not have a DHCP server on your network, then you need to assign the Access Point an IP address that is valid on your network. HTTP Password Each Access Point requires a read/write password to access the web interface. The default password is public. CLI Password Each Access Point requires a read/write password to access the CLI interface. The default password is public. SNMP Read Password Each Access Point requires a password to allow get requests from an SNMP manager. The default password is public. SNMP Read-Write Password Each Access Point requires a password to allow get and set requests from an SNMP manager. The default password is public. Security Settings You need to determine what security features you will enable on the Access Point. Authentication Method A primary authentication server may be configured; a backup authentication server is optional. The network administrator typically provides this information. Authentication Server Shared Secret This is a password shared between the Access Point and the RADIUS authentication server (so both passwords must be the same), and is typically provided by the network administrator. Authentication Server Authentication Port This is a port number (default is 1812) and is typically provided by the network administrator. Client IP Address Pool Allocation Scheme The Access Point can automatically provide IP addresses to clients as they sign on. The network administrator typically provides the IP Pool range. DNS Server IP Address The network administrator typically provides this IP Address. 17 Installation & Basic Configuration Installation Follow these steps to install an AP-600:
1. Unpack the Access Point and accessories from the shipping box. 2. If you intend to install the unit free-standing or if you intend to mount it to the ceiling, use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the metal base to the underside of the unit. The metal base and screws are provided. See Mounting Options for additional information. Figure 2-1 Attach the Metal Base 3. Press down on the cable-cover lock located in the front-center of the unit to release the cable cover. cable-cover lock Figure 2-2 Unlock the Cable Cover 4. Remove the cable cover from the unit. 18 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-3 Remove Cable Cover 5. Remove the front cover (the side with the LED indicators) from the unit. Figure 2-4 Remove the Front Cover 6. Remove the back cover from the unit. 19 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-5 Remove the Back Cover 7. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Access Points Ethernet port. The other end of the cable should not be connected to another device until after the installation is complete.
Use a straight-through Ethernet cable if you intend to connect the Access Point to a hub, switch, patch panel, or Active Ethernet power injector. Use a cross-over Ethernet cable if you intend to connect the Access Point to a single computer.
If you are not using Active Ethernet (or you want to connect the Access Point to Active Ethernet and AC power simultaneously), attach the AC power cable to the Access Points power port. 8. Power Cable Ethernet Cable Figure 2-6 Attach Ethernet Cable and Power Cable 20 Installation & Basic Configuration 127(127(127(127(
Once attached, the power cable locks into place. To disconnect the power cable, slide back the black plastic fitting and gently pull the cable from the connector. 9. Connect the free end of the Ethernet cable to a hub, switch, patch panel, Active Ethernet power injector, or an Ethernet port on a computer. 10. If using AC power, connect the power cord to a power source (such as a wall outlet) to turn on the unit. 11. Configure and test the unit. See Initialization for details. 12. Download the latest software to the unit, if necessary. See Download the Latest Software for details. 13. Place the unit in the final installation location. See Mounting Options for mounting options and instructions. 127(127(127(127(
Proxim recommends that you perform a Site Survey prior to determine the installation location for your AP-600 units. For information about how to conduct a Site Survey, contact your local reseller. 14. Replace the back cover, front cover, and cable cover. Be careful to avoid trapping the power and Ethernet cables when replacing the cable cover. Figure 2-7 Assembled Unit 15. If desired, you can attach a Kensington lock to secure the cable cover into place. This will protect the unit from unauthorized tampering. See Kensington Security Slot for details. 21 Installation & Basic Configuration Initialization ScanTool Setup Wizard Proxim provides two tools to simplify the initialization and configuration of an AP-600:
ScanTool is included on the ORiNOCO CD; the Setup Wizard launches automatically the first time you access the HTTP interface. 127(127(127(127(
These initialization instructions describe how to configure an AP-600 over an Ethernet connection using ScanTool and the HTTP interface. If you want to configure the unit over the serial port, see Setting IP Address using Serial Port and Normal CLI for information on how to access the CLI over a serial connection and Command Line Interface (CLI) for a list of supported commands. ScanTool ScanTool is a software utility that is included on the installation CD-ROM. The tool automatically detects the Access Points installed on your network, regardless of IP address, and lets you configure each units IP settings. In addition, you can use ScanTool to download new software to an AP-600 that does not have a valid software image installed (see Client Connection Problems). To access the HTTP interface and configure the AP-600, the AP-600 must be assigned an IP address that is valid on its Ethernet network. By default, the AP-600 is configured to obtain an IP address automatically from a network Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server during boot-up. If your network contains a DHCP server, you can run ScanTool to find out what IP address the AP-600 has been assigned. If your network does not contain a DHCP server, the Access Points IP address defaults to 169.254.128.132. In this case, you can use ScanTool to assign the AP-600 a static IP address that is valid on your network. ScanTool Instructions Follow these steps to install ScanTool, initialize the Access Point, and perform initial configuration:
1. Locate the units Ethernet MAC address and write it down for future reference. The MAC address is printed on the product label. Each unit has a unique MAC address, which is assigned at the factory. 2. Confirm that the AP-600 is connected to the same LAN subnet as the computer that you will use to configure the AP-600. 3. Power up, reboot, or reset the AP-600. 4. Result: The unit requests an IP Address from the network DHCP server. Insert the ORiNOCO CD into the CD-ROM drive of the computer that you will use to configure the AP-600. Result: The installation program will launch automatically. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Access Point software and documentation. 127(127(127(127(
The ORiNOCO Installation program supports the following operating systems:
Windows 98
Windows 2000
Windows ME
Windows XP 6. After the software has been installed, double-click the ScanTool icon on the Windows desktop to launch the program. Result: ScanTool scans the subnet and displays all detected ORiNOCO Access Points. The ScanTools Scan List screen appears, as shown in the following example. 22 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-8 Scan List 7. Locate the MAC address of the AP-600 you want to initialize within the Scan List. 127(127(127(127(
If your Access Point does not show up in the Scan List, click the Rescan button to update the display. If the unit still does not appear in the list, see Troubleshooting for suggestions. Note that after rebooting an Access Point, it may take up to five minutes for the unit to appear in the Scan List. 8. Do one of the following:
If the AP-600 has been assigned an IP address by a DHCP server on the network, write down the IP address and click Cancel to close ScanTool. Proceed to Setup Wizard for information on how to access the HTTP interface using this IP address. If the AP-600 has not been assigned an IP address (in other words, the unit is using its default IP address, 169.254.128.132), follow these steps to assign it a static IP address that is valid on your network:
1. Highlight the entry for the AP-600 you want to configure. 2. Click the Change button. Result: the Change screen appears. Figure 2-9 Scan Tool Change Screen 23 Installation & Basic Configuration 3. Set IP Address Type to Static. 4. Enter a static IP Address for the AP-600 in the field provided. You must assign the unit a unique address that is valid on your IP subnet. Contact your network administrator if you need assistance selecting an IP address for the unit. 5. Enter your networks Subnet Mask in the field provided. 6. Enter your networks Gateway IP Address in the field provided. 7. Enter the SNMP Read/Write password in the Read/Write Password field (for new units, the default SNMP Read/Write password is public). 127(127(127(127(
The TFTP Server IP Address and Image File Name fields are only available if ScanTool detects that the AP-600 does not have a valid software image installed. See Client Connection Problems. 8. Click OK to save your changes. Result: The Access Point will reboot automatically and any changes you made will take effect. 9. When prompted, click OK a second time to return to the Scan List screen. 10. Click Cancel to close the ScanTool. 11. Proceed to Setup Wizard for information on how to access the HTTP interface. Setup Wizard The first time you connect to an AP-600s HTTP interface, the Setup Wizard launches automatically. The Setup Wizard provides step-by-step instructions for how to configure the Access Points basic operating parameter, such as Network Name, IP parameters, system parameters, and management passwords. Setup Wizard Instructions Follow these steps to access the Access Points HTTP interface and launch the Setup Wizard:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer. 127(127(127(127(
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
Netscape 4.x or later 2. If necessary, disable the browsers Internet proxy settings. For Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
Select Tools > Internet Options.... Click the Connections tab. Click LAN Settings.... If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy server box. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet Explorer. 3. Enter the Access Points IP address in the browsers Address field and press Enter. This is either the dynamic IP address assigned by a network DHCP server or the static IP address you manually configured. See ScanTool for information on how to determine the units IP address and manually configure a new IP address, if necessary. Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears. 4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field. Leave the User Name field blank. For new units, the default HTTP password is public. Result: The Setup Wizard will launch automatically. 24 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-10 Enter Network Password Figure 2-11 Setup Wizard 5. Click Setup Wizard to begin. If you want to configure the AP-600 without using the Setup Wizard, click Exit and see Advanced Configuration. The Setup Wizard supports the following navigation options:
Save & Next Button: Each Setup Wizard screen has a Save & Next button. Click this button to submit any changes you made to the units parameters and continue to the next page. The instructions below describe how to navigate the Setup Wizard using the Save & Next buttons. Navigation Panel: The Setup Wizard provides a navigation panel on the left-hand side of the screen. Click the link that corresponds to the parameters you want to configure to be taken to that particular configuration screen. Note that clicking a link in the navigation panel will not submit any changes you made to the units configuration on the current page. Exit: The navigation panel also includes an Exit option. Click this link to close the Setup Wizard at any time.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 If you exit from the Setup Wizard, any changes you submitted (by clicking the Save & Next button) up to that point will be saved to the unit but will not take effect until it is rebooted. 6. Configure the System Configuration settings and click Save & Next. See System for more information. 7. Configure the Access Points Basic IP address settings, if necessary, and click Save & Next. See Basic IP Parameters for more information. 25
8. Assign the AP-600 new passwords to prevent unauthorized access and click Save & Next. Each management Installation & Basic Configuration interface has its own password:
SNMP Read Password SNMP Read-Write Password CLI Password HTTP (Web) Password By default, each of these passwords is set to public. See Passwords for more information. 9. Configure the basic wireless interface settings and click Save & Next.
The following options are available for the AP-600a:
Network Name (SSID): Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31 characters long) for the wireless network. You must configure each wireless client to use this name as well. Auto Channel Select: By default, the AP-600a scans the area for other Access Points and selects a free or relatively unused communication channel. This helps prevent interference problems and increases network performance. Remove the check mark to disable this option. Note that you cannot disable Auto Channel Select for 802.11a products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for details). Frequency Channel: When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this field is read-only and displays the Access Points current operating channel. When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you can specify the Access Points channel. If you decide to manually set the units channel, ensure that nearby devices do not use the same frequency. Available Channels vary based on regulatory domain. See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a. Note that you cannot manually set the channel for 802.11a products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for details). Transmit Rate: Use the drop-down menu to select a specific transmit rate for the AP-600a. Choose between 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/s, and Auto Fallback. The Auto Fallback feature allows the AP-600a unit to select the best transmit rate based on the cell size. WEP Encryption: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable WEP encryption. See WEP Encryption for more information. Set Encryption Key 1: If you enabled Encryption, configure an Encryption Key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt data between the AP-600a and its wireless clients. Enter the number of characters that correspond to the desired key size, as described below:
Enter 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII Character Chart) to use 64-bit encryption. Enter 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII characters to use 128-bit encryption. Enter 32 hexadecimal characters or 16 ASCII characters to use 152-bit encryption.
The following options are available for the AP-600b:
Network Name (SSID): Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31 characters long) for the wireless network. You must configure each wireless client to use this name as well. Auto Channel Select: The AP-600b scans the area for other Access Points and selects a free or relatively unused communication channel. This helps prevent interference problems and increases network performance. Remove the check mark to disable this option. If you are setting up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS), it must be disabled. See Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for more information. Frequency Channel: When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this field is read-only and displays the Access Points current operating channel. When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you can specify the Access Points operating channel. If you decide to manually set the units channel, ensure that nearby devices do not use the same frequency (unless you are setting up a WDS). Available Channels vary based on regulatory domain. See 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b. Distance Between APs: Set to Large, Medium, Small, Microcell, or Minicell depending on the site survey for your system. The distance value is related to the Multicast Rate (described next). In general, a larger distance between APs means that your clients operate a slower data rates (on average). See Distance Between APs for more information. 26 Installation & Basic Configuration Multicast Rate: Sets the rate at which Multicast messages are sent. This value is related to the Distance Between APs parameter (described previously). The table below displays the possible Multicast Rates based on the Distance between APs. See Multicast Rate for more information. Distance between APs Multicast Rate Large Medium Small Minicell Microcell 1 and 2 Mbits/sec 1, 2, and 5.5 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec WEP Encryption: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable WEP encryption. See WEP Encryption for more information. Set Encryption Key 1: If you enabled Encryption, configure an Encryption Key. This key is used to encrypt and decrypt data between the AP-600a and its wireless clients. Enter the number of characters that correspond to the desired key size, as described below:
Enter 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII Character Chart) to use 64-bit encryption. Enter 26 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 13 ASCII characters to use 128-bit encryption. 127(127(127(127(
Additional advanced settings are available in the Wireless Interface Configuration screen. See Wireless
(AP-600a) or Wireless (AP-600b) for details. See Security for more information on security features. 10. Review the configuration summary. If you want to make any additional changes, use the navigation panel on the left-hand side of the screen to return to an earlier screen. After making a change, click Save & Next to save the change and proceed to the next screen. 11. When finished, click Reboot on the Summary screen to restart the AP-600 and apply your changes. Download the Latest Software Proxim periodically releases updated software for the AP-600 on its Web site at http://www.proxim.com/support/. Proxim recommends that you check the Web site for the latest updates after you have installed and initialized the unit. Three types of files can be downloaded to the AP-600 from a TFTP server:
Img (AP software image or kernel) Config (configuration file) bspBl (BSP/Bootloader firmware file) Setup your TFTP Server A Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server allows you to transfer files across a network. You can upload files from the AP-600 for backup or copying, and you can download the files for configuration and AP Image upgrades. The Solarwinds TFTP server software is located on the ORiNOCO AP-600 Installation CD-ROM. You can also download the latest TFTP software from Solarwinds Web site at http://www.solarwinds.net. If a TFTP server is not configured and running, you will not be able to download and upload images and configuration files to/from the AP-600. Remember that the TFTP server does not have to be local as long as you have a valid TFTP IP address. Also, a TFTP server does not have to be running for the AP-600 to perform tasks that do not involve file transfers. After the TFTP server is installed:
Check to see that TFTP is configured to point to the directory containing the AP Image.
Make sure you have the proper TFTP server IP address, the proper AP Image file name, and that the TFTP server is operational.
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWK7UDQVPLWDQG5HFHLYHILOHVZLWKQRDXWRPDWLFVKXWGRZQRU
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWK7UDQVPLWDQG5HFHLYHILOHVZLWKQRDXWRPDWLFVKXWGRZQRU
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWK7UDQVPLWDQG5HFHLYHILOHVZLWKQRDXWRPDWLFVKXWGRZQRU
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWK7UDQVPLWDQG5HFHLYHILOHVZLWKQRDXWRPDWLFVKXWGRZQRU
WLPHWLPHWLPHWLPH-RXWRXWRXWRXW
27 Installation & Basic Configuration Download Updates from your TFTP Server using the Web Interface 1. Download the latest software from http://www.proxim.com/support/. 2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server. 3. 4. Enter the IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided. 5. Enter the File Name (including the file extension). Enter the full directory path and file name. If the file is located in In the Web Interface, click the Commands button and select the Download tab. the default TFTP directory, you need enter only the file name. 6. Select the File Type from the drop-down menu (use Img for software updates). 7. Select Download & Reboot from the File Operation drop-down menu. 8. Click OK. 9. The Access Point will reboot automatically when the download is complete. Download Updates from your TFTP Server using the CLI Interface 1. Download the latest software from http://www.proxim.com/support/. 2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server. 3. Open the CLI interface via Telnet or a serial connection. 4. Enter the CLI password when prompted. 5. Type set tftpfilename <file name> (include the file extension) and press Enter. 6. Type set tftpfiletype img and press Enter. 7. Type set tftpipaddr <IP address of your TFTP server> and press Enter. 8. Type show tftp and confirm that the file name, file type, and IP address are correct. 9. Type download * and press Enter. Result: The download will begin. Be patient while the image is downloaded to the Access Point. 10. When the download is complete, type reboot 0 and press Enter. 127(127(127(127(
See Command Line Interface (CLI) for more information. Additional Hardware Features
Mounting Options
Kensington Security Slot LED Indicators Mounting Options There are three mounting options for the AP-600, described below. Desktop Mount This is the standard installation for the AP-600. See Installation for instructions. Wall Mount Follow these steps to mount the AP-600 on a wall:
1. Identify the location where you intend to mount the unit. 127(127(127(127(
For best results, mount the unit vertically. In other words, the antenna should be pointing up or down but not sideways. 2. Unplug the Access Points power supply, if necessary. 3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the metal base from the underside of the AP-600, if necessary. 4. Press down on the cable cover lock to release the cable cover. See Unlock the Cable Cover for an illustration. 5. Remove the cable cover from the unit. See Remove Cable Cover for an illustration. 6. Remove the front cover from the unit. See Remove the Front Cover for an illustration. 28 Installation & Basic Configuration 7. Remove the back cover from the unit. See Remove the Back Cover for an illustration. 8. Place the back cover on the mounting location and mark the center of the three mounting holes. 9. Remove the cover from the wall and drill a hole at each of the locations you marked above. Each hole should be wide enough to hold a mounting plug (which is 6 mm x 35 mm). 10. Insert a plug into each hole. The AP-600 comes with four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs; you only need to use three of these when wall mounting the unit. 11. Insert a screw into each of the mounting holes molded into the back cover. The AP-600 comes with four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head screws; you only need to use three of these when wall mounting the unit. 12. Insert the screws into the wall plugs. Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws and attach the back cover to the wall. In the following example, the back cover is mounted upside down (the two holes are at the bottom). Figure 2-12 Attach the Back Cover to the Wall 13. Attach Ethernet and power cables to the AP-600 unit, if necessary. 14. Snap the unit into the back cover. In the following example, the unit is mounted upside down and its antenna is facing down. 29 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-13 AP-600 Mounted on a Wall 15. Replace the front cover. 16. Replace the cable cover. 17. Turn on the AP-600. Ceiling Mount Follow these steps to mount the AP-600 to a ceiling:
1. Unplug the Access Points power supply, if necessary. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the metal base to the underside of the AP-600, if necessary. See Attach the Metal Base for an illustration. 3. Feed a mounting screw through each of the four rubber feet. The AP-600 comes with four 3.5 mm x 40 mm pan-head screws. 4. Remove the screws from the rubber feet. 5. Turn the AP-600 upside down position the base against the ceiling where you want to mount the unit. 6. Mark the center of the four mounting holes in the rubber feet. 7. Set the AP-600 aside and drill a hole at each of the locations you marked above. Each hole should be wide enough to hold a mounting plug (which is 6 mm x 35 mm). Insert a plug into each hole. The AP-600 comes with four 6 mm x 35 mm plugs. Insert the screws into the holes you made previously in the rubber feet. 8. 9. 10. Insert the screws into the wall plugs. Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws and attach the Access Points metal base to the ceiling. 30 Installation & Basic Configuration Figure 2-14 Mounting the AP-600 to the Ceiling Kensington Security Slot The AP-600 enclosure includes a Kensington Security Slot for use with a Kensington locking mechanism. When properly installed, a Kensington lock can prevent unauthorized personnel from stealing the AP-600. In addition, the Kensington locks secures the cable cover in place, which prevents tampering with the Ethernet and power cables. The Kensington Security Slot is shown in the illustrations below (the figure on the left shows the slot with the cable cover attached; the figure on the right shows the slot with the cable cover removed). See http://www.kensington.com for information on Kensington security solutions. Figure 2-15 Kensington Security Slot 31 Installation & Basic Configuration LED Indicators The AP-600 has four LED indicators. The LEDs are identified in LED Indicators Illustrated and exhibit the following behavior:
Power Solid Green Solid Amber Solid Green Solid Red Blinking Red Blinking Red Solid Red Solid Red Blinking Amber Solid Amber Ethernet Link Green when link exists Solid Amber Solid Amber Off Blinking Red or Off Off Blinking Red or Off Off Blinking Amber or Off Blinking Amber or Off Off Solid Amber Ethernet Activity Green flash with data activity Solid Amber Solid Amber Off Blinking Red Off Solid Red Off Solid Amber Wireless Activity Green flash with data activity Solid Amber Solid Amber Off Off Blinking Red Off Solid Red Solid Amber n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Amber Red Amber Indication Normal Operation Rebooting Reset to Factory Defaults command issued SDRAM Test Failure Hardware Timer Test Failure Flash Test Failure Ethernet Test Failure Wireless Test Failure Missing or bad AP image Missing or bad bootloader image (all LEDs remain solid amber) Wireless radio is not working properly Indicated interface in administrative down state Power LED Ethernet Link LED Ethernet Activity LED Wireless Activity LED Figure 2-16 LED Indicators Illustrated Related Topics The Setup Wizard helps you configure the basic AP-600 settings required to get the unit up and running. The AP-600 supports many other configuration and management options. The remainder of this user guide describes these options in detail. See Advanced Configuration for information on configuration options that are available within the Access Points HTTP interface. See Monitor Information for information on the statistics displayed within the Access Points HTTP interface. See Commands for information on the commands supported by the Access Points HTTP interface. See Troubleshooting for troubleshooting suggestions. See Command Line Interface (CLI) for information on the CLI interface and for a list of CLI commands. 32 Status Information In This Chapter 3 This chapter describes the statistical information that is reported within the Access Points HTTP interface.
Logging into the HTTP Interface System Status Logging into the HTTP Interface Once the AP-600 has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may use your web browser to monitor the system status. Follow these steps to monitor an AP-600s operating statistics using the HTTP interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer. 127(127(127(127(
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
Netscape 4.x or later 2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
Select Tools > Internet Options.... Click the Connections tab. Click LAN Settings.... If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy server box. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet Explorer. 3. Enter the Access Points IP address in the browsers Address field and press Enter. Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears. 4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK. Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password is public). Result: The System Status screen appears. Figure 3-1 Enter Network Password Screen 33 System Status System Status is the first screen to appear each time you connect to the HTTP interface. You can also return to this screen by clicking the Status button. Status Information Figure 3-2 System Status Screen Each section of the System Status screen provides the following information:
System Status: This area provides system level information, including the units IP address and contact information. See System for information on these settings. System Alarms: System traps (if any) appear in this area. Each trap identifies a specific severity level:
Critical, Major, Minor, and Informational. See System Alarms (Traps) for a list of possible alarms. 34 Advanced Configuration In This Chapter 4 System: Configure specific system information such as system name and contact information. This chapter describes all of the operating parameters that can be configured using the Access Points HTTP interface.
Configuring the AP-600 Using the HTTP Interface
Network: Configure IP settings, DNS client, DHCP server, and Link Integrity.
Interfaces: Configure the Access Points interfaces: Wireless and Ethernet.
Management: Configure the Access Points management Passwords, IP Access Table, and Services.
Filtering: Configure Ethernet Protocol filters, Static MAC Address filters, Advanced filters, and Port filters. Alarms: Configure the Alarm (SNMP Trap) Groups, the Alarm Host Table, and the Syslog features. Bridge: Configure the Spanning Tree Protocol, Storm Threshold protection, Intra BSS traffic, and Packet Forwarding. Security: Configure security features such as MAC Access Control, WEP Encryption, and 802.1x.
RADIUS: Configure RADIUS features such as RADIUS Access Control and Accounting. Configuring the AP-600 Using the HTTP Interface Follow these steps to configure an Access Points operating settings using the HTTP interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer. 127(127(127(127(
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
Netscape 4.x or later 2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
Select Tools > Internet Options.... Click the Connections tab. Click LAN Settings.... If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy server box. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet Explorer. 3. Enter the Access Points IP address in the browsers Address field and press Enter. Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears. 4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK. Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password is public). Result: The System Status screen appears. 35 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-1 Enter Network Password Screen 5. Click the Configure button located on the left-hand side of the screen. Figure 4-2 Configure Main Screen 6. Click the tab that corresponds to the parameter you want to configure. For example, click Network to configure the Access Points TCP/IP settings. The parameters contained in each of the nine configuration categories are described later in this chapter. 7. Configure the Access Points parameters as necessary. After changing a configuration value, click OK to save the change. 8. Reboot the Access Point for all of the changes to take effect. 36 Advanced Configuration System Location: The location where the AP-600 is installed. You can configure and view the following parameters within the System Configuration screen:
Name: The name assigned to the AP-600.
Contact Name: The name of the person responsible for the AP-600.
Contact Email: The email address of the person responsible for the AP-600.
Contact Phone: The telephone number of the person responsible for the AP-600.
Object ID: This is a read-only field that displays the Access Points MIB definition; this information is useful if you
are managing the AP-600 using SNMP. Ethernet MAC Address: This is a read-only field that displays the unique MAC (Media Access Control) address for the Access Points Ethernet interface. The MAC address is assigned at the factory.
Descriptor: This is a read-only field that reports the Access Points name, serial number, current image software version, and current bootloader software version.
Up Time: This is a read-only field that displays how long the Access Point has been running since its last reboot. Network The Network category contains three sub-categories. IP Configuration DHCP Server Link Integrity IP Configuration You can configure and view the following parameters within the IP Configuration screen:
127(127(127(127(
You must reboot the Access Point in order for any changes to the Basic IP or DNS Client parameters take effect. Basic IP Parameters
IP Address Assignment Type: Set this parameter to Dynamic to configure the Access Point as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client; the Access Point will obtain IP settings from a network DHCP server automatically during boot-up. If you do not have a DHCP server or if you want to manually configure the Access Points IP settings, set this parameter to Static. IP Address: The Access Points IP address. When IP Address Assignment Type is set to Dynamic, this field is read-only and reports the units current IP address. The Access Point will default to 169.254.128.132 if it cannot obtain an address from a DHCP server. Subnet Mask: The Access Points subnet mask. When IP Address Assignment Type is set to Dynamic, this field is read-only and reports the units current subnet mask. The subnet mask will default to 255.255.0.0 if the unit cannot obtain one from a DHCP server.
Gateway IP Address: The IP address of the Access Points gateway. When IP Address Assignment Type is set to Dynamic, this field is read-only and reports the IP address of the units gateway. The gateway IP address will default to 169.254.128.133 if the unit cannot obtain an address from a DHCP server. DNS Client If you prefer to use host names to identify network servers rather than IP addresses, you can configure the AP-600 to act as a Domain Name Service (DNS) client. When this feature is enabled, the Access Point contacts the networks DNS server to translate a host name to the appropriate network IP address. You can use this DNS Client functionality to identify RADIUS servers by host name. See RADIUS for details.
Enable DNS Client: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable DNS client functionality. Note that this option must be enabled before you can configure the other DNS Client parameters.
DNS Primary Server IP Address: The IP address of the networks primary DNS server.
DNS Secondary Server IP Address: The IP address of a second DNS server on the network. The Access Point will attempt to contact the secondary server if the primary server is unavailable. 37 Advanced Configuration
DNS Client Default Domain Name: The default domain name for the Access Points network (for example, proxim.com). Contact your network administrator if you need assistance setting this parameter. Advanced
Default TTL (Time to Live): Time to Live (TTL) is a field in an IP packet that specifies how long in seconds the packet can remain active on the network. The Access Point uses the default TTL for packets it generates for which the transport layer protocol does not specify a TTL value. This parameter supports a range from 0 to 65535. By default, TTL is 64. DHCP Server If your network does not have a DHCP Server, you can configure the AP-600 as a DHCP server to assign dynamic IP addresses to Ethernet nodes and wireless clients.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Make sure there are no other DHCP servers on the network and do not enable the DHCP server without checking with your network administrator first, as it could bring down the whole network. Also, the AP-600 must be configured with a static IP address before enabling this feature. When the DHCP Server functionality is enabled, you can create one or more IP address pools from which to assign addresses to network devices. Figure 4-3 DHCP Server Configuration Screen You can configure and view the following parameters within the DHCP Server Configuration screen:
Enable DHCP Server: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable DHCP Server functionality. 127(127(127(127(
You cannot enable the DHCP Server functionality unless there is at least one IP Pool Table Entry configured.
Subnet Mask: This field is read-only and reports the Access Points current subnet mask. DHCP clients that receive dynamic addresses from the AP-600 will be assigned this same subnet mask. 38 Advanced Configuration
Gateway IP Address: The AP-600 will assign the specified address to its DHCP clients.
Number of IP Pool Table Entries: This is a read-only field that reports the number of IP address pools currently Primary DNS IP Address: The AP-600 will assign the specified address to its DHCP clients. Secondary DNS IP Address: The AP-600 will assign the specified address to its DHCP clients.
configured. IP Pool Table Entry: This entry specifies a range of IP addresses that the AP can assign to its wireless clients. Click Add to create a new entry. Click Edit to change an existing entry. Each entry contains the following field:
Start IP Address End IP Address Default Lease Time (optional): The default time value for clients to retain the assigned IP address. DHCP automatically renews IP Addresses without client notification. This parameter supports a range between 0 and 86400 seconds. The default is 86400 seconds. Maximum Lease Time (optional): The maximum time value for clients to retain the assigned IP address. DHCP automatically renews IP Addresses without client notification. This parameter supports a range between 0 and 86400 seconds. The default is 86400 seconds. Comment (optional) Status: IP Pools are enabled upon entry in the table. You can also disable or delete entries by changing this fields value. 127(127(127(127(
You must reboot the Access Point before changes to any of these DHCP server parameters take effect. Link Integrity The Link Integrity feature checks the link between the AP-600 and the nodes on the Ethernet backbone. These nodes are listed by IP address in the Link Integrity IP Address Table. The AP-600 periodically pings the nodes listed within the table. If the AP-600 loses network connectivity (that is, the ping attempts fail), the AP-600 disables its wireless interface until the connection is restored. This forces the units wireless clients to switch to another Access Point that still has a network connection. Note that this feature does not affect WDS links (if applicable). Figure 4-4 Link Integrity Configuration Screen 39 Advanced Configuration
You can configure and view the following parameters within the Link Integrity Configuration screen:
Enable Link Integrity: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable Link Integrity. Poll Interval (milliseconds): The interval between link integrity checks. Range is 500 - 15000 ms in increments of 500 ms; default is 500 ms. Poll Retransmissions: The number of times a poll should be retransmitted before the link is considered down. Range is 0 to 255; default is 5. Target IP Address Entry: This entry specifies the IP address of a host on the network that the AP-600 will periodically poll to confirm connectivity. The table can hold up to five entries. By default, all five entries are set to 0.0.0.0. Click Edit to update one or more entries. Each entry contains the following field:
Target IP Address Comment (optional) Status: Set this field to Enable to specify that the Access Point should poll this device. You can also disable an entry by changing this fields value to Disable. Interfaces From the Interfaces tab, you configure the Access Points radio and Ethernet settings. Refer to the Wireless parameters below that correspond to your Access Point model (AP-600a or AP-600b). The Ethernet settings apply to both models. Wireless (AP-600a) Wireless (AP-600b) Ethernet Wireless (AP-600a) You can configure and view the following parameters within the Wireless Interface Configuration screen for an AP-600a:
127(127(127(127(
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these parameters take effect.
Physical Interface Type: For the AP-600a, this field reports: 802.11a (OFDM 5 GHz). OFDM stands for Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing; this is the name for the radio technology used by 802.11a devices.
MAC Address: This is a read-only field that displays the unique MAC (Media Access Control) address for the Access Points wireless interface. The MAC address is assigned at the factory.
Regulatory Domain: Reports the regulatory domain for which the AP-600a is certified. Not all features or channels are available in all countries. The available regulatory domains include:
U.S./Canada -- FCC (5.15-5.35 GHz, 5.725-5.850 GHz) Europe -- ETSI (5.15-5.25 GHz only) Europe -- ETSI (5.15-5.35 GHz) Japan -- MMK (5.15-5.25 GHz) Singapore (5.15-2.25 GHz, 5.725-5.850 GHz)
Network Name (SSID): Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31 characters long) for the wireless network. You must configure each wireless client to use this name as well.
Auto Channel Select: The AP-600a scans the area for other Access Points and selects a free or relatively unused communication channel. This helps prevent interference problems and increases network performance. By default this feature is enabled. Note that you cannot disable Auto Channel Select for 802.11a products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for details). See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a for a list of Channels. Turbo Mode: The AP-600a supports 2X Turbo Mode, an extension of the IEEE 802.11a standard that provides twice the data rate. Note that 2X Turbo mode is not defined in the IEEE 802.11a specification. By default, Turbo mode is disabled. Turbo mode is not available in all countries. Frequency Channel: When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this field is read-only and displays the Access Points current operating Channel. When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you can specify the Access Points channel. If you decide to manually set the units Channel, ensure that nearby devices do not use the same frequency. Available Channels vary based on regulatory domain and the Turbo Mode setting. See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a. Note that you cannot manually set the channel for 802.11a products in Europe (see Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for details).
40 Advanced Configuration
Transmit Rate: Use the drop-down menu to select a specific transmit rate for the AP-600a. Choose between 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbits/s, and Auto Fallback for standard 802.11a mode. If Turbo mode is enabled, choose between 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 72, 98, 108 Mbits/s, and Auto Fallback. Auto Fallback is the default setting; it allows the AP-600a unit to select the best transmit rate based on the cell size.
DTIM Period: The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is used with clients that have power management enabled. DTIM should be left at 1, the default value, if any clients have power management enabled. This parameter supports a range between 1 and 65535.
RTS/CTS Medium Reservation: This parameter affects message flow control and should not be changed under normal circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set to a value between 0 and 2347, the Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism for packets that are the specified size or greater. When set to 2347 (the default setting), RTS/CTS is disabled. See RTS/CTS Medium Reservation for more information. Figure 4-5 Wireless Interface Configuration Screen (AP-600a) Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) AP-600a units sold in Europe use a technique called Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) to automatically select an operating channel. During boot-up, the AP-600a scans the available frequency and selects a channel that is free of interference. If the AP-600a subsequently detects interference on its channel, it automatically reboots and selects another channel that is free of interference. DFS only applies to AP-600a devices used in Europe (i.e., units whose regulatory domain is set to ETSI). The European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) requires that 802.11a devices use DFS to prevent interference with radar systems and other devices that already occupy the 5 GHz band. If you are using an AP-600a in Europe, keep in mind the following:
DFS is not a configurable parameter. It is always enabled and cannot be disabled. You cannot manually select the devices operating channel; you must let DFS select the channel. You cannot configure the Auto Channel Select option. Within the HTTP interface, this option always appears enabled. 41 Advanced Configuration RTS/CTS Medium Reservation The 802.11 standard supports optional RTS/CTS communication based on packet size. Without RTS/CTS, a sending radio listens to see if another radio is already using the medium before transmitting a data packet. If the medium is free, the sending radio transmits its packet. However, there is no guarantee that another radio is not transmitting a packet at the same time, causing a collision. This typically occurs when there are hidden nodes (clients that can communicate with the Access Point but are out of range of each other) in very large cells. When RTS/CTS occurs, the sending radio first transmits a Request to Send (RTS) packet to confirm that the medium is clear. When the receiving radio successfully receives the RTS packet, it transmits back a Clear to Send (CTS) packet to the sending radio. When the sending radio receives the CTS packet, it sends the data packet to the receiving radio. The RTS and CTS packets contain a reservation time to notify other radios (including hidden nodes) that the medium is in use for a specified period. This helps to minimize collisions. While RTS/CTS adds overhead to the radio network, it is particularly useful for large packets that take longer to resend after a collision occurs. RTS/CTS Medium Reservation is an advanced parameter and supports a range between 0 and 2347 bytes. When set to 2347 (the default setting), the RTS/CTS mechanism is disabled. When set to 0, the RTS/CTS mechanism is used for all packets. When set to a value between 0 and 2347, the Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism for packets that are the specified size or greater. You should not need to enable this parameter for most networks unless you suspect that the wireless cell contains hidden nodes. Wireless (AP-600b) You can configure and view the following parameters within the Wireless Interface Configuration screen for an AP-600b:
127(127(127(127(
You must reboot the Access Point before any changes to these parameters take effect.
Physical Interface Type: For the AP-600b, this field reports: 802.11b (DSSS 2.4 GHz). DSSS stands for Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum; this is the name for the radio technology used by 802.11b devices.
MAC Address: This is a read-only field that displays the unique MAC (Media Access Control) address for the Access Points wireless interface. The MAC address is assigned at the factory.
Regulatory Domain: Reports the regulatory domain for which the AP-600b is certified. Not all features or channels are available in all countries. The available regulatory domains include:
U.S./Canada -- FCC (2.4000-2.4835 GHz) Europe -- ETSI (2.4000-2.4835 GHz; France only: 2.4465-2.4835 GHz) Japan -- MKK (2.4000 GHz-2.4970 GHz)
Network Name (SSID): Enter a Network Name (between 2 and 31 characters long) for the wireless network. You must configure each wireless client to use this name as well.
Auto Channel Select: The AP-600b scans the area for other Access Points and selects a free or relatively unused communication channel. This helps prevent interference problems and increases network performance. By default this feature is enabled; see 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b for a list of Channels. However, if you are setting up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS), it must be disabled. See Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for more information. Frequency Channel: When Auto Channel Select is enabled, this field is read-only and displays the Access Points current operating channel. When Auto Channel Select is disabled, you can specify the Access Points operating channel. If you decide to manually set the units channel, ensure that nearby devices do not use the same frequency (unless you are setting up a WDS). Available Channels vary based on regulatory domain. See 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b.
Distance Between APs: Set to Large, Medium, Small, Microcell, or Minicell depending on the site survey for your system. By default, this parameter is set to Large. The distance value is related to the Multicast Rate
(described next). In general, a larger distance between APs means that your clients operate a slower data rates
(on average). See Distance Between APs for more information. 42 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-6 Wireless Interface Configuration Screen (AP-600b)
Multicast Rate: Sets the rate at which Multicast messages are sent. This value is related to the Distance Between APs parameter (described previously). The table below displays the possible Multicast Rates based on the Distance between APs setting. By default, this parameter is set to 2 Mbits/sec. See Multicast Rate for more information. Distance between APs Multicast Rate Large Medium Small Minicell Microcell 1 and 2 Mbits/sec 1, 2, and 5.5 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec
DTIM Period: The Deferred Traffic Indicator Map (DTIM) is used with clients that have power management enabled. DTIM should be left at 1, the default value, if any clients have power management enabled. This parameter supports a range between 1 and 65535.
RTS/CTS Medium Reservation: This parameter affects message flow control and should not be changed under normal circumstances. Range is 0 to 2347. When set to a value between 0 and 2347, the Access Point uses the RTS/CTS mechanism for packets that are the specified size or greater. When set to 2347 (the default setting), RTS/CTS is disabled. See RTS/CTS Medium Reservation for more information. Interference Robustness: Enable this option if other electrical devices in the 2.4 GHz frequency band (such as a microwave oven or a cordless phone) may be interfering with the wireless signal. The AP-600b will automatically fragment large packets into multiple smaller packets when interference is detected to increase the likelihood that the messages will be received in the presence of interference. The receiving radio reassembles the original packet once all fragments have been received. This option is disabled by default.
Closed System: Check this box to allow only clients configured with the Access Points specific Network Name to associate with the Access Point. When enabled, a client configured with the Network Name ANY cannot connect to the AP-600b. This option is disabled by default. 43 Advanced Configuration
Load Balancing: Enable this option so clients can evaluate which Access Point to associate with, based on current AP loads. This feature is enabled by default; it helps distribute the wireless load between APs. This feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b.
Medium Density Distribution: When enabled, the Access Point automatically notifies wireless clients of its Distance Between APs, Interference Robustness, and RTS/CTS Medium Reservation settings. This feature is enabled by default and allows clients to automatically adopt the values used by its current Access Point (even if these values differ from the clients default values or from the values supported by other Access Points). Note that this feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b. Proxim recommends that you leave this parameter enabled, particularly if you have ORiNOCO clients on your wireless network (leaving this parameter enabled should not adversely affect the performance of any ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCards or non-ORiNOCO cards on your network). Distance Between APs Distance Between APs defines how far apart (physically) your AP-600b devices are located, which in turn determines the size of your cell. Cells of different sizes have different capacities and, therefore, suit different applications. For instance, a typical office has many stations that require high bandwidth for complex, high-speed data processing. In contrast, a typical warehouse has a few forklifts requiring low bandwidth for simple transactions. 127(127(127(127(
This feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b. Cell capacities are compared in the following table, which shows that small cells suit most offices and large cells suit most warehouses:
Small Cell Large Cell Physically accommodates few stations High cell bandwidth per station High transmit rate Physically accommodates many stations Lower cell bandwidth per station Lower transmit rate Coverage The number of Access Points in a set area determines the network coverage for that area. A large number of Access Points covering a small area is a high-density cell. A few Access Points, or even a single unit, covering the same small area would result in a low-density cell, even though in both cases the actual area did not change only the number of Access Points covering the area changed. In a typical office, a high density area consists of a number of Access Points installed every 20 feet and each Access Point generates a small radio cell with a diameter of about 10 feet. In contrast, a typical warehouse might have a low density area consisting of large cells (with a diameter of about 90 feet) and Access Points installed every 200 feet. Figure 4-7 Low Density vs. Ultra High Density Network The Distance Between Cells parameter supports five values: Large, Medium, Small, Minicell, and Microcell. 44 Advanced Configuration
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 The distance between APs should not be approximated. It is calculated by means of a manual Site Survey, in which an AP-600b is set up and clients are tested throughout the area to determine signal strength and coverage, and local limits such as physical interference are investigated. From these measurements the appropriate cell size and density is determined, and the optimum distance between APs is calculated to suit your particular business requirements. Contact your reseller for information on how to conduct a Site Survey. Multicast Rate The multicast rate determines the rate at which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted by the Access Point to the wireless network. Stations that are closer to the Access Point can receive multicast packets at a faster data rate than stations that are farther away from the AP. Therefore, you should set the Multicast Rate based on the size of the Access Points cell. For example, if the Access Points cell is very small (e.g., Distance Between APs is set to Microcell), you can expect that all stations should be able to successfully receive multicast packets at 11 MBits/sec so you can set Multicast Rate to 11 Mbits/sec. However, if the Access Points cell is large, you need to accommodate stations that may not be able to receive multicast packets at the higher rates; in this case, you should set Multicast Rate to 1 or 2 Mbits/sec. 11 Mbits/s 1 Mbit/s Figure 4-8 1 Mbits/s and 11 Mbits/s Multicast Rates 127(127(127(127(
There is an inter-dependent relationship between the Distance between APs and the Multicast Rate. In general, larger systems operate at a lower average transmit rate. The variation between Multicast Rate and Distance Between APs is presented in the following table:
1.0 Mbit/s 2.0 Mbits/s 5.5 Mbits/s 11 Mbits/s Large Medium Small Minicell Microcell yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes The Distance Between APs must be set before the Multicast Rate, because when you select the Distance Between APs, the appropriate range of Multicast values automatically populates the drop-down menu. This feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b. 45 Advanced Configuration Wireless Distribution System (WDS) A Wireless Distribution System (WDS) creates a link between two AP-600b units over their radio interfaces. This link relays traffic from one AP-600b that does not have Ethernet connectivity to a second AP-600b that has Ethernet connectivity. WDS allows you to configure up to six (6) point-to-point links between Access Points. In the WDS Example below, AP 1 and AP 2 communicate over a WDS link (represented by the blue line). This link provides Client 1 with access to network resources even though AP 1 is not directly connected to the Ethernet network. Packets destined for or sent by the client are relayed between the Access Points over the WDS link. 127(127(127(127(
This feature is not available with the AP-600a. AP 2 Client 2 AP 1 Client 1 Figure 4-9 WDS Example Bridging WDS Each WDS link is mapped to a logical WDS port on the AP-600b. WDS ports behave like Ethernet ports rather than like standard wireless interfaces: on a BSS port, an Access Point learns by association and from frames; on a WDS or Ethernet port, an Access Point learns from frames only. When setting up a WDS, keep in mind the following:
The WDS link shares the communication bandwidth with the clients. Therefore, while the maximum data rate for the Access Points cell is still 11 Mb, client throughput will decrease when the WDS link is active. If there is no partner MAC address configured in the WDS table, the WDS port remains disabled. Each WDS port on a single AP-600b should have a unique partner MAC address. Do not enter the same MAC address twice in an AP-600bs WDS port list. Each Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the same Channel setting to communicate with each other. Each Access Point that is a member of the WDS must have the same WEP Encryption settings. WDS does not use 802.1x. Therefore, if you want to encrypt the WDS link, you must configure each Access Point to use WEP encryption (either WEP encryption only or Mixed Mode), and each Access Point must have the same Encryption Key(s). See Security. If your network does not support spanning tree, be careful to avoid creating network loops between AP-600b devices. For example, creating a WDS link between two Access Points connected to the same Ethernet network will create a network loop (if spanning tree is disabled).
WDS Setup Procedure 127(127(127(127(
You must disable Auto Channel Select to create a WDS. 46 Advanced Configuration To setup a wireless backbone follow the steps below for each AP-600b that you wish to include in the Wireless Distribution System. 1. Confirm that Auto Channel Select is disabled. 2. Write down the MAC Address of the radio that you wish to include in the Wireless Distribution System. 3. Open the Wireless Interface Configuration screen. 4. Scroll down to the Wireless Distribution System heading. 5. Click the Edit button to update the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Table. 6. Enter the MAC Address that you wrote down in Step 2 in one of the Partner MAC Address field of the Wireless Distribution Setup window. 7. Set the Status of the device to Enable. 8. Click OK. Figure 4-10 WDS Configuration 9. Restart the AP-600b. 127(127(127(127(
To set up a Wireless Distribution System (WDS) with 802.1x, set each Access Points 802.1x Security Mode to Mixed and assign each unit in the WDS the same Encryption Key 1. See Security. Ethernet Select the desired speed and transmission mode from the drop-down menu. Half-duplex means that only one side can transmit at a time and full-duplex allows both sides to transmit. When set to auto-duplex, the AP-600 negotiates with its switch or hub to automatically select the highest throughput option supported by both sides. For best results, Proxim recommends that you configure the Ethernet setting to match the speed and transmission mode of the device the Access Point is connected to (such as a hub or switch). If in doubt, leave this setting at its default, auto-speed-auto-duplex. Choose between:
10 Mbit/s - half duplex, full duplex, or auto duplex
100 Mbit/s - half duplex, full duplex, or auto duplex
auto speed - half duplex or auto duplex 47 Advanced Configuration Management The Management category contains three sub-categories. Passwords IP Access Table Services Passwords You can configure the following passwords:
SNMP Read Password: The password for read access to the AP-600 using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. SNMP Read/Write Password: The password for read and write access to the AP-600 using SNMP. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. Telnet (CLI) Password: The password for the CLI interface (via serial or Telnet). Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public.
HTTP (Web) Password: The password for the Web browser HTTP interface. Enter a password in both the Password field and the Confirm field. The default password is public. 127(127(127(127(
For security purposes Proxim recommends changing ALL PASSWORDS from the default public immediately, to restrict access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure. IP Access Table The Management IP Access table limits in-band management access to the IP addresses or range of IP addresses specified in the table. This feature applies to all management options (SNMP, HTTP, and CLI) except for CLI management over the serial port. To configure this table, click Add and set the following parameters:
IP Address: Enter the IP Address for the management station. IP Mask: Enter a mask that will act as a filter to limit access to a range of IP Addresses based on the IP Address you already entered. The IP mask 255.255.255.255 would authorize the single station defined by the IP Address to configure the Access Point. The AP-600 would ignore commands from any other IP address. In contrast, the IP mask 255.255.255.0 would allow any device that shares the first three octets of the IP address to configure the AP-600. For example, if you enter an IP address of 10.20.30.1 with a 255.255.255.0 subnet mask, any IP address between 10.20.30.1 and 10.20.30.254 will have access to the APs management interfaces.
Comment: Enter an optional comment, such as the station name. To edit or delete an entry, click Edit. Edit the information, or select Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status pull-down menu. 48 Advanced Configuration Services You can configure the following management services:
127(127(127(127(
You must reboot the Access Point if you change the HTTP Port or Telnet Port. SNMP Settings
SNMP Interface Bitmask: Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the AP-600 via SNMP. You can also select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the AP-600 device via SNMP. HTTP Access
HTTP Interface Bitmap: Configure the interface or interfaces (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you will manage the AP-600 via the Web interface. For example, to allow Web configuration via the Ethernet network only, set HTTP Interface Bitmask to Ethernet. You can also select Disabled to prevent a user from accessing the AP-600 from the Web interface.
HTTP Port: Configure the HTTP port from which you will manage the AP-600 via the Web interface. By default, the HTTP port is 80. Figure 4-11 Management Services Configuration Screen 49 Advanced Configuration Telnet Configuration Settings
Telnet Interface Bitmask: Select the interface (Ethernet, Wireless, All Interfaces) from which you can manage the AP-600 via telnet. This parameter can also be used to Disable telnet management. Telnet Port: The default port number for Telnet applications is 23. However, you can use this field if you want to change the Telnet port for security reasons (but your Telnet application also must support the new port number you select). Login Idle Timeout (seconds): Enter the number of seconds the system will wait for a login attempt. The AP-600 terminates the session when it times out. The range is 1 to 300 seconds; the default is 30 seconds. Session Idle Timeout (seconds): Enter the number of seconds the system will wait during a session while there is no activity. The AP-600 will terminate the session on timeout. The range is 1 to 36000 seconds; the default is 900 seconds. Serial Configuration Settings The serial port interface on the AP-600 is enabled at all times. See Setting IP Address using Serial Port and Normal CLI for information on how to access the CLI interface via the serial port. You can configure and view following parameters:
Baud Rate: Select the serial port speed (bits per second). Choose between 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600; the default Baud Rate is 9600. Flow Control: Select either None (default) or Xon/Xoff (software controlled) data flow control. 127(127(127(127(
To avoid potential problems when communicating with the AP-600 through the serial port, Proxim recommends that you leave the Flow Control setting at None (the default value).
Serial Data Bits: This is a read-only field and displays the number of data bits used in serial communication
(8 data bits by default). Serial Parity: This is a read-only field and displays the number of parity bits used in serial communication
(no parity bits by default). Serial Stop Bits: This is a read-only field that displays the number of stop bits used in serial communication
(1 stop bit by default). 127(127(127(127(
The serial port bit configuration is commonly referred to as 8N1. Filtering The Access Points Packet Filtering features help control the amount of traffic exchanged between the wired and wireless networks. There are four sub-categories under the Filtering heading. Ethernet Protocol Static MAC Advanced TCP/UDP Port Ethernet Protocol The Ethernet Protocol Filter blocks or forwards packets based on the Ethernet protocols they support. Follow these steps to configure the Ethernet Protocol Filter:
1. Select the interfaces or interfaces that will implement the filter from the Ethernet Protocol Filtering drop-down menu. Ethernet: Packets are examined at the Ethernet interface
Wireless: Packets are examined at the Wireless interface
All Interfaces: Packets are examined at both interfaces Disabled: The filter is not used 2. Select the Filter Operation Type.
If set to Passthru, only the enabled Ethernet Protocols listed in the Filter Table will pass through the bridge. If set to Block, the bridge will block enabled Ethernet Protocols listed in the Filter Table. 50 Advanced Configuration 3. Configure the Ethernet Protocol Filter Table. This table is pre-populated with existing Ethernet Protocol Filters, however, you may enter additional filters by specifying the appropriate parameters.
To add an entry, click Add, and then specify the Protocol Number and a Protocol Name. Protocol Number: Enter the protocol number. See http://www.iana.org/assignments/ethernet-numbers for a list of protocol numbers. Protocol Name: Enter related information, typically the protocol name. To edit or delete an entry, click Edit and change the information, or select Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status drop-down menu. An entrys status must be enabled in order for the protocol to be subject to the filter.
Static MAC The Static MAC Address filter optimizes the performance of a wireless (and wired) network. When this feature is properly configured, the AP-600 can block traffic between wired devices and wireless devices based on MAC address. For example, you can set up a Static MAC filter to prevent wireless clients from communicating with a specific server on the Ethernet network. You can also use this filter to block unnecessary multicast packets from being forwarded to the wireless network. 127(127(127(127(
The Static MAC Filter is an advanced feature. You may find it easier to control wireless traffic via other filtering options, such as Ethernet Protocol Filtering. Each static MAC entry contains the following fields:
Wired MAC Address
Wired Mask
Wireless MAC Address
Wireless Mask
Comment: This field is optional. Each MAC Address or Mask is comprised of 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F) that correspond to a 48-bit identifier.
(Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 bits (0 or 1).) Taken together, a MAC Address/Mask pair specifies an address or a range of MAC addresses that the AP-600 will look for when examining packets. The AP-600 uses Boolean logic to perform an AND operation between the MAC Address and the Mask at the bit level. However, for most users, you do not need to think in terms of bits. It should be sufficient to create a filter using only the hexadecimal digits 0 and F in the Mask (where 0 is any value and F is the value specified in the MAC address). A Mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 corresponds to all MAC addresses, and a Mask of FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF applies only to the specified MAC Address. For example, if the MAC Address is 00:20:A6:12:54:C3 and the Mask is FF:FF:FF:00:00:00, the AP-600 will examine the source and destination addresses of each packet looking for any MAC address starting with 00:20:A6. If the Mask is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, the AP-600 will only look for the specific MAC address (in this case, 00:20:A6:12:54:C3). When creating a filter, you can configure the Wired parameters only, the Wireless parameters only, or both sets of parameters. Which parameters to configure depends upon the traffic that you want block:
To prevent all traffic from a specific wired MAC address from being forwarded to the wireless network, configure only the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask (leave the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask set to all zeros). To prevent all traffic from a specific wireless MAC address from being forwarded to the wired network, configure only the Wireless MAC address and Wireless Mask (leave the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask set to all zeros). To block traffic between a specific wired MAC address and a specific wireless MAC address, configure all four parameters. To create an entry, click Add and enter the appropriate MAC addresses and Masks to setup a filter. The entry is enabled automatically when saved. To edit an entry, click Edit. To disable or remove an entry, click Edit and change the Status field from Enable to Disable or Delete. 51 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-12 Static MAC Configuration Screen Static MAC Filter Examples Consider a network that contains a wired server and three wireless clients. The MAC address for each unit is as follows:
Wired Server: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A Wireless Client 1: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 Wireless Client 2: 00:02:2D:51:32:12 Wireless Client 3: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38 Prevent Two Specific Devices from Communicating Configure the following settings to prevent the Wired Server and Wireless Client 1 from communicating:
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4
Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result: Traffic between the Wired Server and Wireless Client 1 is blocked. Wireless Clients 2 and 3 can still communicate with the Wired Server. Prevent Multiple Wireless Devices From Communicating With a Single Wired Device Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Clients 1 and 2 from communicating with the Wired Server.
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4
Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:00:00:00 Result: When a logical AND is performed on the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask, the result corresponds to any MAC address beginning with the 00:20:2D prefix. Since Wireless Client 1 and Wireless Client 2 share the same prefix (00:02:2D), traffic between the Wired Server and Wireless Clients 1 and 2 is blocked. Wireless Client 3 can still communicate with the Wired Server since it has a different prefix (00:20:A6). 52 Advanced Configuration Prevent All Wireless Devices From Communicating With a Single Wired Device Configure the following settings to prevent all three Wireless Clients from communicating with Wired Server 1.
Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A
Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Result: The Access Point blocks all traffic between Wired Server 1 and all wireless clients. Prevent A Wireless Device From Communicating With the Wired Network Configure the following settings to prevent Wireless Client 3 from communicating with any device on the Ethernet.
Wired MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Wired Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Wireless MAC Address: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38
Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result: The Access Point blocks all traffic between Wireless Client 3 and the Ethernet network. Prevent Messages Destined for a Specific Multicast Group from Being Forwarded to the Wireless LAN If there are devices on your Ethernet network that use multicast packets to communicate and these packets are not required by your wireless clients, you can set up a Static MAC filter to preserve wireless bandwidth. For example, if routers on your network use a specific multicast address (such as 01:00:5E:00:32:4B) to exchange information, you can set up a filter to prevent these multicast packets from being forwarded to the wireless network:
Wired MAC Address: 01:00:5E:00:32:4B
Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 Result: The Access Point does not forward any packets that have a destination address of 01:00:5E:00:32:4B to the wireless network. Advanced You can configure the following advanced filtering options:
Enable Proxy ARP: Place a check mark in the box provided to allow the Access Point to respond to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests for wireless clients. When enabled, the AP-600 answers ARP requests for wireless stations without actually forwarding them to the wireless network. If disabled, the Access Point will bridge ARP requests for wireless clients to the wireless LAN. Enable IP/ARP Filtering: Place a check mark in the box provided to allow IP/ARP filtering based on the IP/ARP Filtering Address and IP Mask. Leave the box unchecked to prevent filtering. If enabled, you should also configure the IP/ARP Filtering Address and IP/ARP IP Mask. IP/ARP Filtering Address: Enter the Network filtering IP Address. IP/ARP IP Mask: Enter the Network Mask IP Address. The following protocols are listed in the Advanced Filter Table:
Deny IPX RIP
Deny IPX SAP
Deny IPX LSP
Deny IP Broadcasts
Deny IP Multicasts The AP-600 can filter these protocols in the wireless-to-Ethernet direction, the Ethernet-to-wireless direction, or in both directions. Click Edit and use the Status field to Enable or Disable the filter. 53 Advanced Configuration TCP/UDP Port Port-based filtering enables you to control wireless user access to network services by selectively blocking TCP/UDP protocols through the AP-600. A user specifies a Protocol Name, Port Number, Port Type (TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP), and filtering interfaces (Wireless only, Ethernet only, all interfaces, or no interfaces) in order to block access to services, such as Telnet and FTP, and traffic, such as NETBIOS and HTTP. For example, an AP-600 with the following configuration would discard frames received on its Wireless radio with a UDP destination port number of 137, effectively blocking NETBIOS Name Service packets. Protocol Type
(TCP/UDP) Destination Port Number UDP 137 Protocol Name Interface Status
(Enable/Disable) NETBIOS Name Service Wireless Enable Adding TCP/UDP Port Filters 1. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable TCP/UDP Port Filtering. 2. Click Add under the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table heading. Figure 4-13 Adding a New TCP/UDP Port Filter Entry In the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table, enter the Protocol Names to filter. 3. 4. Set the destination Port Number (a value between 0 and 65535) to filter. See the IANA Web site at http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers for a list of assigned port numbers and their descriptions. 5. Set the Port Type for the protocol: TCP, UDP, or both (TCP/UDP). 6. Set the Interface to filter:
Wireless Ethernet
All interfaces No interfaces
7. Click OK. 127(127(127(127(
Filters are enabled by default. Packets that the AP-600 receives on the specified interface(s) with the specified TCP/UDP destination port, are discarded. Editing TCP/UDP Port Filters 1. Click Edit under the TCP/UDP Port Filter Table heading. 2. Make any changes to the Protocol Name or Port Number for a specific entry, if necessary. 3. 4. Select OK. In the row that defines the port, set the Status to Enable, Disable, or Delete, as appropriate. 54 Advanced Configuration Alarms This category has three sub-categories. Groups Alarm Host Table Syslog Groups Enable Configuration Alarms Enable Security Alarms Enable Wireless Alarms Enable Operational Alarms Enable Flash Memory Alarms Enable TFTP Alarms Enable Image Alarms There are seven alarm groups that can be enabled or disabled:
Place a check mark in the box provided to enable a specific group. Remove the check mark from the box to disable the alarms. These alarm groups correspond to System Alarms that are displayed in the HTTP interfaces System Status screen and to traps that are sent by the AP-600 to the SNMP managers specified in the Alarm Host Table. See System Alarms (Traps) for the list of alarms contained in each group. Alarm Host Table IP Address: Enter the Trap Host IP Address. Password: Enter the password in the Password field and the Confirm field. To add an entry and enable the AP-600 to send SNMP trap messages to a Trap Host, click Add, and then specify the IP Address and Password for the Trap Host.
Comment: Enter an optional comment, such as the alarm (trap) host station name. To edit or delete an entry, click Edit. Edit the information, or select Enable, Disable, or Delete from the Status drop-down menu. Syslog The Syslog messaging system enables the AP-600 to transmit event messages to a central server for monitoring and troubleshooting. The access point logs Session Start (Log-in) and Session Stop (Log-out) events for each wireless client as an alternative to RADIUS accounting. See RFC 3164 at http://www.rfc-editor.org/ for more information on the Syslog standard. Setting Syslog Event Notifications Syslog Events are logged according to the level of detail specified by the administrator. Logging only urgent system messages will create a far smaller, more easily read log then a log of every event the system encounters. Determine which events to log by selecting a priority defined by the following scale:
55 Advanced Configuration Event Priority Description LOG_EMERG LOG_ALERT LOG_CRIT LOG_ERR LOG_WARNING LOG_NOTICE LOG_INFO LOG_DEBUG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 system is unusable action must be taken immediately critical conditions error conditions warning conditions normal but significant condition informational debug-level messages Configuring Syslog Event Notifications You can configure the following Syslog settings from the HTTP interface:
Enable Syslog: Place a check mark in the box provided to enable system logging. Syslog Port Number: This field is read-only and displays the port number (514) assigned for system logging. Syslog Lowest Priority Logged: The AP-600 will send event messages to the Syslog server that correspond to the selected priority and above. For example, if set to 6, the AP-600 will transmit event messages labeled priority 0 to 6 to the Syslog server(s). Syslog Host Table: This table specifies the IP addresses of a network servers that the AP-600 will send Syslog messages to. Click Add to create a new entry. Click Edit to change an existing entry. Each entry contains the following field:
IP Address: Enter the IP Address for the management host. Comment: Enter an optional comment such as the host name. Status: The entry is enabled automatically when saved (so the Status field is only visible when editing an entry). You can also disable or delete entries by changing this fields value.
Figure 4-14 Syslog Configuration Screen 56 Advanced Configuration Bridge Forward and filtering decision making Spanning Tree protocol used for loop avoidance The AP-600 is a bridge between your wired and wireless networking devices. As a bridge, the functions performed by the AP-600 include:
MAC address learning
Once the AP-600 is connected to your network, it learns which devices are connected to it and records their MAC addresses in the Learn Table. The table can hold up to 10,000 entries. To view the Learn Table, click on the Monitor button in the web interface and select the Learn Table tab. The Bridge tab has four sub-categories. Spanning Tree Storm Threshold Intra BSS Packet Forwarding Spanning Tree A Spanning Tree is used to avoid redundant communication loops in networks with multiple bridging devices. Bridges do not have any inherent mechanism to avoid loops, because having redundant systems is a necessity in certain networks. However, redundant systems can cause Broadcast Storms, multiple frame copies, and MAC address table instability problems. Complex network structures can create multiple loops within a network. The Spanning Tree configuration blocks certain ports on AP-600 devices to control the path of communication within the network, avoiding loops and following a spanning tree structure. For more information on Spanning Tree protocol, please see Section 8.0 of the IEEE 802.1d standard. The Spanning Tree configuration options are advanced settings. Proxim recommends that you leave these parameters at their default values unless you are familiar with the Spanning Tree protocol. Storm Threshold Storm Threshold is an advanced Bridge setup option that you can use to protect the network against data overload by:
Specifying a maximum number of frames per second as received from a single network device (identified by its MAC address). Specifying an absolute maximum number of messages per port.
The Storm Threshold parameters allow you to specify a set of thresholds for each port of the AP-600, identifying separate values for the number of broadcast messages/second and Multicast messages/second. When the number of frames for a port or identified station exceeds the maximum value per second, the AP-600 will ignore all subsequent messages issued by the particular network device, or ignore all messages of that type. Address Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Ethernet Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Wireless Threshold: Enter the maximum allowed number of packets per second. Intra BSS The wireless clients (or subscribers) that associate with a certain AP-600 form the Basic Service Set (BSS) of a network infrastructure. By default, wireless subscribers in the same BSS can communicate with each other. However, some administrators (such as wireless public spaces) may wish to block traffic between wireless subscribers that are associated with the same AP-600 to prevent unauthorized communication and to conserve bandwidth. This feature enables you to prevent wireless subscribers within a BSS from exchanging traffic. Although this feature is generally enabled in public access environments, Enterprise LAN administrators use it to conserve wireless bandwidth by limiting communication between wireless clients. For example, this feature prevents peer-to-peer file sharing or gaming over the wireless network. To block Intra BSS traffic, set Intra BSS Traffic Operation to Block. To allow Intra BSS traffic, set Intra BSS Traffic Operation to Passthru. 57 Advanced Configuration Packet Forwarding The Packet Forwarding feature enables you to redirect traffic generated by wireless clients that are all associated to the same AP-600 to a single MAC address. This filters wireless traffic without burdening the AP-600 and provides additional security by limiting potential destinations or by routing the traffic directly to a firewall. You can redirect to a specific port (Ethernet or WDS) or allow the bridges learning process (and the forwarding table entry for the selected MAC address) to determine the optimal port. 127(127(127(127(
The gateway to which traffic will be redirected should be node on the Ethernet network. It should not be a wireless client. Configuring Interfaces for Packet Forwarding Configure your AP-600 to forward packets by specifying interface port(s) to which packets are redirected and a destination MAC address. 1. Within the Packet Forwarding Configuration screen, check the box labeled Enable Packet Forwarding. 2. Specify a destination Packet Forwarding MAC Address. The AP-600 will redirect all unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets received from wireless clients to the address you specify. 3. Select a Packet Forwarding Interface Port from the drop-down menu. You can redirect traffic to:
Ethernet A WDS connection (see Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for details) Any (traffic is redirected to a port based on the bridge learning process) 4. Click OK to save your changes. Security The AP-600 provides three security features to protect your network from unauthorized individuals. MAC Access WEP Encryption 802.1x The HTTP interface provides a configuration screen for each of these features. MAC Access The MAC Access tab allows you to build a list of stations, identified by their MAC addresses, authorized to access the network through the AP-600. The list is stored inside each AP-600 within your network. Note that you must reboot the AP-600 for any changes to the MAC Access Control Table to take effect.
Operation Type: Choose between Passthru and Block. This determines how the stations identified in the MAC Enable MAC Access Control: Check this box to enable the Control Table. Access Control Table are filtered.
If set to Passthru, only the addresses listed in the Control Table will pass through the bridge. If set to Block, the bridge will block traffic to or from the addresses listed in the Control Table.
MAC Access Control Table: Click Add to create a new entry. Click Edit to change an existing entry. Each entry contains the following field:
MAC Address: Enter the wireless clients MAC address.
Comment: Enter an optional comment such as the clients name. Status: The entry is enabled automatically when saved (so the Status field is only visible when editing an entry). You can also disable or delete entries by changing this fields value. 127(127(127(127(
For larger networks that include multiple Access Points, you may prefer to maintain this list on a centralized location using the MAC Access Control Via RADIUS Authentication. 58 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-15 MAC Access Configuration Screen WEP Encryption The IEEE 802.11 standards specify an optional encryption feature, known as Wired Equivalent Privacy or WEP, that is designed to provide a wireless LAN with a security level equal to what is found on a wired Ethernet network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on an 802.11 network using an Encryption Key (also known as a WEP Key). When Encryption is enabled, two 802.11 devices must have the same Encryption Keys and both devices must be configured to use Encryption in order to communicate. If one device is configured to use Encryption but a second device is not, then the two devices will not communicate, even if both devices have the same Encryption Keys.
The AP-600b supports 64-bit and 128-bit encryption:
For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters
(see ASCII Character Chart). For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII characters.
The AP-600a supports 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit encryption:
For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters
(see ASCII Character Chart). For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII characters. For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal characters or 16 ASCII characters. 127(127(127(127(
64-bit encryption is sometimes referred to as 40-bit encryption; 128-bit encryption is sometimes referred to as 104-bit encryption. 59 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-16 Encryption Configuration Follow these steps to set up WEP encryption on an AP-600:
1. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Encryption (WEP). 2. Enter one to four Encryption Keys in the fields provided. Keep in mind the following:
If entering more than one Key, use the same number of characters for each Key. All Keys need to be the same Key Size (64, 128, or 152-bit). You can enter the Encryption Keys in either hexadecimal or ASCII format. You need to configure your wireless clients to use the same Keys in order for the clients and the AP-600 to communicate. 3. Set Deny Non-Encrypted Data to Enable if you want to prevent clients that do not have WEP enabled or the proper keys configured from communicating with the network. 4. Select the Key that the AP-600 will use to encryption outgoing data from the Encrypt Data Transmissions Using drop-down menu. By default, this parameter is set to Key 1. 5. Click OK. 802.1x IEEE 802.1x is a standard that provides a means to authenticate and authorize network devices attached to a LAN port. A port in the context of IEEE 802.1x is a point of attachment to the LAN, either a physical Ethernet connection or a wireless link to an Access Point. 802.1x requires a RADIUS server and uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP) as a standards-based authentication framework, and supports automatic key distribution for enhanced security. The EAP-based authentication framework can easily be upgraded to keep pace with future EAP types. Popular EAP types include:
EAPoL (EAP over LAN): Transport protocol used to negotiate the wireless users secure connection to the network. EAP messages are encapsulated in 802.1x messages. EAP-Message Digest 5 (MD5): Username/Password-based authentication; does not support automatic key distribution
60 Advanced Configuration
EAP-Transport Layer Security (TLS): Certificate-based authentication (a certificate is required on the server and each client); supports automatic key distribution EAP-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS): Certificate-based authentication (a certificate is required on the server; a clients username/password is tunneled to the server over a secure connection); supports automatic key distribution PEAP - Protected EAP with MS-CHAP v2: Secure username/password-based authentication; supports automatic key distribution Different servers support different EAP types and each EAP type provides different features. Refer to the documentation that came with your RADIUS server to determine which EAP types it supports. 127(127(127(127(
The AP-600 supports the following EAP types when 802.1x Security Mode is set to 802.1x: EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-TTLS. When 802.1x Security Mode is set to Mixed, the AP-600 supports the following EAP types:
EAP-TLS, PEAP, EAP-TLLS, and EAP-MD5 (MD5 does not support automatic key distribution; therefore, if you choose this method you need to manually configure each client with the networks encryption key). Authentication Process There are three main components in the authentication process. The standard refers to them as:
1. 2. 3. supplicant (client PC) authenticator (Access Point) authentication server (RADIUS server) When using 802.1x Security Mode or Mixed mode (802.1x and WEP), you need to configure your RADIUS server for authentication purposes. Prior to successful authentication, an unauthenticated client PC cannot send any data traffic through the AP-600 device to other systems on the LAN. The AP-600 inhibits all data traffic from a particular client PC until the client PC is authenticated. Regardless of its authentication status, a client PC can always exchange 802.1x messages in the clear with the AP-600 (the client begins encrypting data after it has been authenticated). EAP Over Wireless EAP Over RADIUS PC Client Access Point RADIUS Server Figure 4-17 RADIUS Authentication Illustrated The AP-600 acts as a pass-through device to facilitate communications between the client PC and the RADIUS server. The AP-600 and the client exchange 802.1x messages using an EAPOL (EAP Over LAN) protocol. Messages sent from the client station are encapsulated by the AP-600 and transmitted to the RADIUS server using EAP extensions. Upon receiving a reply EAP packet from the RADIUS, the message is typically forwarded to the client, after translating it back to the EAPOL format. Negotiations take place between the client and the RADIUS server. After the client has been successfully authenticated, the client receives an Encryption Key from the AP-600 (if the EAP type supports automatic key distribution). The client uses this key to encrypt data after it has been authenticated. For 802.11a clients that communicate with an AP-600a, each client receives its own unique encryption key; this is known as Per User Per Session Encryption Keys. (This feature is only available when using 802.1x mode; it is not available when in Mixed mode or using WEP encryption only). 61 Advanced Configuration Configuring Security Settings The AP-600 offers four security settings:
127(127(127(127(
802.1x settings are located under the 802.1x heading. WEP Encryption settings are located under the Encryption heading.
No security or encryption
WEP encryption only See WEP Encryption for details. 802.1x security
Mixed Mode (802.1x and WEP Encryption) 802.1x Security Follow these steps to enable 802.1x only:
1. Within the 802.1x Configuration screen, set 802.1x Security Mode to 802.1x. 2. Select an Encryption Key Length.
The AP-600b supports 64-bit and 128-bit encryption. The AP-600a supports 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit encryption. 3. Enter a Re-keying Interval.
The Re-keying Interval determines how often a clients encryption key is changed and can be set to any value between 60 - 65535 seconds. Rekeying frustrates hacking attempts without taxing system resources. Setting a fairly frequent rekey value (900 seconds=15 minutes) effectively protects against intrusion without disrupting network activities. 4. Click OK to save the changes. 5. If you have not already done so, configure the RADIUS authentication settings (see RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x for details. 6. Reboot the Access Point. Figure 4-18 802.1x Configuration Screen 62 Advanced Configuration Mixed Mode (802.1x and WEP Encryption) Follow these steps to use both 802.1x and WEP Encryption simultaneously (clients that do not support 802.1x use WEP Encryption for security purposes):
1. Within the 802.1x Configuration screen, set 802.1x Security Mode to Mixed. 2. Select an Encryption Key Length.
The AP-600b supports 64-bit and 128-bit encryption. The AP-600a supports 64-bit, 128-bit, and 152-bit encryption. 3. Enter a Re-keying Interval.
The Re-keying Interval determines how often a clients encryption key is changed and can be set to any value between 60 - 65535 seconds. Rekeying frustrates hacking attempts without taxing system resources. Setting a fairly frequent rekey value (900 seconds=15 minutes) effectively protects against intrusion without disrupting network activities. 4. Click OK to save the changes. 5. Click the Encryption tab. 1. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Encryption (WEP). 2. Configure Encryption Key 1 only (i.e., do not configure Keys 2 through 4). Keep in mind the following:
Use the same key size (64/128/152-bit) that you configured for Encryption Key Length on the 802.1x page. For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F) or 5 ASCII characters (see ASCII Character Chart). For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII characters. For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal characters or 16 ASCII characters. You can enter the Encryption Keys in either hexadecimal or ASCII format. You need to manually configure your wireless clients that do not support 802.1x to use the same Encryption Key. 3. Set Deny Non-Encrypted Data to Enable if you want to prevent clients that do not have WEP enabled or the proper keys configured from communicating with the network. 4. Confirm that Key 1 is selected in the Encrypt Data Transmissions Using drop-down menu. 5. Click OK. 6. If you have not already done so, configure the RADIUS authentication settings (see RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x for details. 7. Reboot the Access Point. 802.1x Security and Wireless Distribution Systems (WDS) Wireless distribution systems (WDS) are configured using specific ports on the AP-600b. To use 802.1x with WDS, you need to set the 802.1x Security Mode to Mixed (WEP and 802.1x) and confirm that the AP-600b units communicating in the WDS share the same encryption key (Key 1). See Wireless Distribution System (WDS) for more information. 127(127(127(127(
The AP-600a does not support WDS. RADIUS The AP-600 communicates with a networks RADIUS server to provide the following features:
MAC Access Control Via RADIUS Authentication RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x RADIUS Accounting You can configure the AP-600 to communicate with up to four different RADIUS servers:
Primary Authentication Server Back-up Authentication Server Primary Accounting Server Back-up Accounting Server 127(127(127(127(
You must have configured the settings for at least one Authentication server before configuring the settings for an Accounting server. 63 Advanced Configuration The back-up servers are optional, but when configured, the AP-600 will communicate with the back-up server if the primary server is off-line. After the AP-600 has switched to the backup server, it will periodically check the status of the primary RADIUS server every five (5) minutes. Once the primary RADIUS server is again online, the AP-600 automatically reverts from the backup RADIUS server back to the primary RADIUS server. All subsequent requests are then sent to the primary RADIUS server. MAC Access Control Via RADIUS Authentication If you want to control wireless access to the network and if your network includes a RADIUS Server, you can store the list of MAC addresses on the RADIUS server rather than configure each AP-600 individually. From the RADIUS Authentication tab, you can define the IP Address of the server that contains a central list of MAC Address values that identify the authorized stations that may access the wireless network. You must specify information for at least the primary RADIUS server. The back-up RADIUS server is optional. 127(127(127(127(
Contact your RADIUS server manufacturer if you have problems configuring the server or have problems using RADIUS authentication. Follow these steps to enable RADIUS MAC Access Control:
1. Within the RADIUS Access Control Configuration screen, place a check mark in the box labeled Enable RADIUS MAC Access Control. 2. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS Authentication Server. 3. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Authentication Server. 4. Enter the time, in seconds, each client session may be active before being automatically re-authenticated in the Authentication Lifetime field. This parameter supports a value between 60 and 43200 sec; the default is 900 sec. 5. Select a MAC Address Format Type. This should correspond to the format in which the clients 12-digit MAC addresses are listed within the RADIUS server. Available options include:
Dash delimited: dash between each pair of digits: xx-yy-zz-aa-bb-cc
Colon delimited: colon between each pair of digits: xx:yy:zz:aa:bb:cc)
Single dash delimited: dash between the sixth and seventh digits: xxyyzz-aabbcc
No delimiters: No characters or spaces between pairs of hexadecimal digits: xxyyzzaabbcc
6. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must configure the AP-600 as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details. 7. Enter the servers IP address or name in the field provided. 8. Enter the port number which the AP-600 and the server will use to communicate. By default, RADIUS servers communicate on port 1812. 9. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS server and the AP-600. The same password must also be configured on the RADIUS server. 10. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP-600 should wait for the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds. 11. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field. Range is 1-4; default is 3. 12. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 6 through 11 for the back-up server. 13. Click OK to save your changes. 14. Reboot the AP-600 device for these changes to take effect. 64 Advanced Configuration Figure 4-19 RADIUS Access Control Configuration Screen RADIUS Authentication with 802.1x You must configure a primary RADIUS Authentication server to use 802.1x security. A back-up server is optional. 127(127(127(127(
Problems with RADIUS Server configuration or RADIUS Authentication should be referred to the RADIUS Server developer. Follow these steps to enable a RADIUS Authentication server for 802.1x security:
1. Within the 802.1x Configuration screen, configure the 802.1x settings. See 802.1x for details. 2. Click the RADIUS tab. 3. Click the RADIUS Auth sub-tab. 4. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS Authentication Server. 5. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Authentication Server. 6. Enter the time, in seconds, each client session may be active before being automatically re-authenticated in the Authentication Lifetime field. This parameter supports a value between 60 and 43200 sec; the default is 900 sec. 7. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must configure the AP-600 as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details. 8. Enter the servers IP address or name in the field provided. 9. Enter the port number which the AP-600 and the server will use to communicate. By default, RADIUS servers communicate on port 1812. 10. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS server and the AP-600. The same password must also be configured on the RADIUS server. 11. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP-600 should wait for the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds. 65 Advanced Configuration 12. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field. Range is 1-4; default is 3. 13. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 7 through 12 for the back-up server. 14. Click OK to save your changes. 15. Reboot the AP-600 device for these changes to take effect. RADIUS Accounting Using an external RADIUS server, the AP-600 can track and record the length of client sessions on the access point by sending RADIUS accounting messages per RFC2866. When a wireless client is successfully authenticated, RADIUS accounting is initiated by sending an Accounting Start request to the RADIUS server. When the wireless client session ends, an Accounting Stop request is sent to the RADIUS server. Session Length Accounting sessions continue when a client reauthenticates to the same AP-600. Sessions are terminated when:
If the client roams from one AP-600 to another, one session is terminated and a new session is begun. A client disassociates. A client does not transmit any data to the AP-600 for a fixed amount of time. A client is detected on a different interface. 127(127(127(127(
This feature requires RADIUS authentication using MAC Access Control or 802.1x. Wireless clients configured in the Access Points static MAC Access Control list are not tracked. Configuring RADIUS Accounting Follow these steps to enable RADIUS accounting on the AP-600:
1. Within the RADIUS Accounting Configuration screen, place a check mark in the Enable RADIUS Accounting box to turn on this feature. 2. Place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Primary RADIUS Accounting Server. 3. If you want to configure a back-up RADIUS server, place a check mark in the box labeled Enable Back-up RADIUS Accounting Server. 4. Enter the session timeout interval in minutes within the Accounting Inactivity Timer field. An accounting session automatically ends for a client that is idle for the period of time specified. Range is 1-60 minutes; default is 5 minutes. 5. Select a Server Addressing Format type (IP Address or Name).
If you want to identify RADIUS servers by name, you must configure the Access Point as a DNS Client. See DNS Client for details. 6. Enter the servers IP address or name in the field provided. 7. Enter the port number which the AP-600 and the server will use to communicate. By default, RADIUS accounting uses port 1813. 8. Enter the Shared Secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret field. This is a password shared by the RADIUS server and the AP-600. The same password must also be configured on the RADIUS server. 9. Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the AP-600 should wait for the RADIUS server to respond to a request in the Response Time field. Range is 1-10 seconds; default is 3 seconds. 10. Enter the maximum number of times an authentication request may be retransmitted in the Maximum Retransmissions field. Range is 1-4; default is 3. 11. If you are configuring a back-up server, repeat Steps 5 through 10 for the back-up server. 12. Click OK to save your changes. 13. Reboot the AP-600 device for these changes to take effect. 66 Figure 4-20 RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Advanced Configuration 67 Advanced Configuration 68 Advanced Configuration 69 Advanced Configuration 70 Monitor Information In This Chapter 5 Logging into the HTTP Interface Version: Provides version information for the Access Points system components. ICMP: Displays statistics for Internet Control Message Protocol packets sent and received by the AP-600. IP/ARP Table: Displays the AP-600s IP Address Resolution table. Learn Table: Displays the list of nodes that the AP-600 has learned are on the network. IAPP: Provides statistics for the Inter-Access Point Protocol messages sent and received by the AP-600. This chapter describes the statistical information that is reported within the Access Points HTTP interface.
RADIUS: Provides statistics for the configured primary and backup RADIUS server(s).
Interfaces: Displays the Access Points interface statistics (Wireless and Ethernet). Link Test (AP-600b Only): Evaluates the link with a wireless client. Logging into the HTTP Interface Once the AP-600 has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may use your web browser to monitor network statistics. The Command Line Interface (CLI) also provides a method for viewing network statistics using Telnet or a serial connection. This section covers only use of the HTTP interface. For more information about viewing network statistics with the CLI, refer to Command Line Interface (CLI). Follow these steps to monitor an AP-600s operating statistics using the HTTP interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer. 127(127(127(127(
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
Netscape 4.x or later 2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
Select Tools > Internet Options.... Click the Connections tab. Click LAN Settings.... If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy server box. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet Explorer. 3. Enter the Access Points IP address in the browsers Address field and press Enter. Result: The AP-600 Enter Network Password screen appears. 4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK. Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password is public). Result: The System Status screen appears. 68 Monitor Information Figure 5-1 Enter Network Password Screen 5. Click the Monitor button located on the left-hand side of the screen. Figure 5-2 Monitor Main Screen 6. Click the tab that corresponds to the statistics you want to review. For example, click Learn Table to see the list of nodes that the AP-600 has discovered on the network. If applicable, click the Refresh button to update the statistics. 7. Version From the HTTP interface, click the Monitor button and select the Version tab. The list displayed provides you with information that may be pertinent when calling Technical Support. With this information, your Technical Support representative can verify compatibility issues and make sure the latest software are loaded. This screen displays the following information for each Access Point component:
Component Name
ID: The AP-600 identifies a system component based on its ID. Each component has a unique identifier. Variant: Several variants may exist of the same component (for example, a hardware component may have two variants, one with more memory than the other). Serial Number: The components serial number, if applicable. 69
Version: Specifies the components version or build number. The Software Image version is the most useful information on this screen for the typical end user. Monitor Information Figure 5-3 Version Information Screen ICMP This tab provides statistical information for both received and transmitted messages directed to the AP-600. Not all ICMP traffic on the network is counted in the ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) statistics. Figure 5-4 ICMP Monitoring Screen 70 IP/ARP Table This tab provides information based on the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), which relates MAC Address and IP Addresses. Monitor Information Figure 5-5 IP/ARP Table Learn Table This tab displays information relating to network bridging. It reports the MAC address for each node that the device has learned is on the network and the interface on which the node was detected. There can be up 10,000 entries in the Learn Table. Figure 5-6 Learn Table 71 IAPP This tab displays statistics relating to client handovers and communications between ORiNOCO Access Points. Monitor Information Figure 5-7 IAPP Screen RADIUS This tab provides RADIUS authentication and accounting information for both the Primary and Backup RADIUS servers. 127(127(127(127(
RADIUS authentication and accounting must be enabled for this information to be valid. Figure 5-8 RADIUS Monitoring Screen 72 Interfaces This tab displays statistics for the Ethernet and wireless interfaces. The Operational Status can be up, down, or testing. Monitor Information Figure 5-9 Wireless Interface Monitoring 73 Monitor Information Link Test (AP-600b Only) This tab displays information on the quality of the wireless link to clients and other AP-600b units in the Wireless Distribution System. During a Link Test, the Access Point and the selected device exchange a series of packets to test the strength of the connection. The devices start by exchanging packets at the 11 Mbits/sec rate but fall back to the slower rates if necessary. 127(127(127(127(
This feature is not available for the AP-600a. Also, this feature is not available if you are using an ORiNOCO 802.11a/b ComboCard or a non-ORiNOCO client with the AP-600b. Follow these steps to perform a Link Test:
1. Open the Remote Link Test screen. 2. Click Explore. Result: A list of detected stations will appear. If the list does not appear automatically, click Refresh
. Figure 5-10 Remote Link Test Screen 3. Select a Station from the list by clicking the circle to the left of the Stations entry. 4. Click Link Test to start the test. Result: A new Link Test window opens and displays the following information for the Access Point (referred to as the Initiator Station) and the wireless client (referred to as the Remote Station):
Station Name: The Access Points System Name or the clients Windows Networking name. MAC Address SNR (dB): The Signal to Noise ratio for the received signal. The displayed value is the running average since the start of the test and is reported in decibels (dB). Higher numbers correspond to a stronger link. The bar graph also displays the relative strength of the link (a green bar indicates a strong link, a yellow bar indicates a fair link, and a red bar indicates a weak link). Signal (dBm): The strength of the received signal in dBm (decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt). The displayed value is the running average since the start of the test and is reported as a negative number. Higher numbers correspond to a stronger link. For example, -40 dBm corresponds to a stronger signal than -50 dBm. The bar graph also displays the relative strength of the signal (a longer bar represents a stronger signal). Noise (dBm): The strength of the noise detected at the receiver reported in dBm (decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt). The displayed value is the running average since the start of the test and is reported as a negative number. Noise can interfere with the received signal so a smaller noise value corresponds to a stronger link. For example, a noise level of -95 dBm is more desirable than a noise level of -89 dBm. The bar graph displays the relative strength of the noise level (a shorter bar represents a weaker noise level and is more desirable than a longer bar). 11 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 11 Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test. In general, most packets will be received at the 11 Mbits/sec rate if the devices have a strong link.
74 Monitor Information
5.5 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 5.5 Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test. 2 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 2 Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test. 1 Mbps (pkts): The number of packets received at the 1 Mbits/sec transmit rate since the start of the Link Test. 127(127(127(127(
Click the Refresh automatically. button periodically to update the test results. The test screen does not refresh Figure 5-11 SNR Report Screen 5. Click Close to end the Link Test. 75 Monitor Information 76 Monitor Information 77 Commands In This Chapter 6 Logging into the HTTP Interface This chapter describes the commands that can be issued from the Access Points HTTP interface.
Download: Download files from a TFTP server to the AP-600.
Upload: Upload configuration files from the AP-600 to a TFTP server.
Reboot: Reboot the AP-600 in the specified number of seconds.
Reset: Reset all of the Access Points configuration settings to factory defaults.
Help Link: Configure the location where the AP-600 Help files can be found. Logging into the HTTP Interface Once the AP-600 has a valid IP Address and an Ethernet connection, you may use your web browser to issue commands. The Command Line Interface (CLI) also provides a method for issuing commands using Telnet or a serial connection. This section covers only use of the HTTP Interface. For more information about issuing commands with the CLI, refer to Command Line Interface (CLI). Follow these steps to view the available commands supported by the AP-600s HTTP interface:
1. Open a Web browser on a network computer. 127(127(127(127(
The HTTP interface supports the following Web browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
Netscape 4.x or later 2. If necessary, disable the Internet proxy settings. For Internet Explorer users, follow these steps:
Select Tools > Internet Options.... Click the Connections tab. Click LAN Settings.... If necessary, remove the check mark from the Use a proxy server box. Click OK twice to save your changes and return to Internet Explorer. 3. Enter the Access Points IP address in the browsers Address field and press Enter. Result: The Enter Network Password screen appears. 4. Enter the HTTP password in the Password field and click OK. Leave the User Name field blank. (By default, the HTTP password is public). Result: The System Status screen appears. 76 Commands Figure 6-1 Enter Network Password Screen 5. Click the Commands button located on the left-hand side of the screen. Figure 6-2 Commands Main Screen 6. Click the tab that corresponds to the command you want to issue. For example, click Reboot to restart the unit. 77 Download Use the Download tab to download Configuration, AP Image, and Bootloader files to the AP-600. A TFTP server must be running and configured to point to the directory containing the file. Commands Figure 6-3 Download Command Screen If you dont have a TFTP server installed on your system, install the TFTP server from the ORiNOCO CD. You can either install the TFTP server from the CD Wizard or run OEM-TFTP-Server.exe found in the CDs Xtras/SolarWinds sub-directory. The Download tab shows version information and allows you to enter TFTP information as described below.
Server IP Address: Enter the TFTP server IP Address. Double-click the TFTP server icon on your desktop and locate the IP address assigned to the TFTP server. Note: This is the IP address that will be used to point the Access Point to the AP Image file.
File Name: Enter the name of the file to be downloaded (including the file extension). Copy the updated AP Image file to the TFTP servers root folder. The default AP Image is located at C:/ProgramFiles/ORiNOCO/AP600/. Config for configuration information, such as System Name, Contact Name, and so on. Img for the AP Image (executable program). BspBl for the Bootloader software. File Type: Select the proper file type. Choices include:
File Operation: Select either Download or Download & Reboot. You should reboot the AP-600 after downloading files. Upload Use the Upload tab to upload Configuration files from the AP-600. The TFTP server must be running and configured to point to the directory to which you want to copy the uploaded file. We suggest you assign the file a meaningful name, which may include version or location information. If you dont have a TFTP server installed on your system, install the TFTP server from the ORiNOCO CD. You can either install the TFTP server from the CD Wizard or run OEM-TFTP-Server.exe found in the CDs Xtras/SolarWinds sub-directory.
Double-click the TFTP server icon on your desktop and locate the IP address assigned to the TFTP server. Server IP Address: Enter the TFTP server IP Address. File Name: Enter the name of the file to be uploaded. File Type: Select Config. File Operation: Select Upload.
78 Commands Figure 6-4 Upload Command Screen Reboot Use the Reboot tab to save configuration changes (if any) and reset the AP-600. Entering a value of 0 (zero) seconds causes an immediate reboot. Note that Reset, described below, does not save configuration changes.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Rebooting the AP-600 will cause all users who are currently connected to lose their connection to the network until the AP-600 has completed the restart process and resumed operation. Figure 6-5 Reboot Command Screen 79 Commands Reset Use the Reset tab to restore the AP-600 to factory default conditions. The AP-600 may also be reset from the RESET button located on the side of the unit. Since this will reset the Access Points current IP address, a new IP address must be assigned. Refer to Recovery Procedures for more information.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Resetting the AP-600 to its factory default configuration will permanently overwrite all changes that have made to the unit. The AP-600 will reboot automatically after this command has been issued. Figure 6-6 Reset to Factory Defaults Command Screen Help Link To open Help, click the Help button on any display screen. During initialization, the AP-600 on-line help files are downloaded to the default location:
C:\ProgramFiles\ORiNOCO\AP600\Help\English\index.htm. The ORiNOCO AP-600 Help information is available in English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese. The Help files are copied to your computer in all six languages. To update the Help link to use a different language, enter the appropriate path in the Help Link box. For example, to change to the French Help file, enter C:\Program Files\ORiNOCO\AP600\Help\French\index.htm. If you want to place these files on a shared drive, copy the Help Folder to the new location, and then specify the new path in the Help Link box. Figure 6-7 Help Link Configuration Screen 80 Troubleshooting In This Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Concepts Symptoms and Solutions If you are having problems with an AP-600, review the troubleshooting suggestions contained in this chapter.
Recovery Procedures
System Alarms (Traps)
Related Applications 127(127(127(127(
This section helps you locate problems related to the AP-600 device setup. For details about RADIUS, TFTP, serial communication programs (such as HyperTerminal), Telnet applications, or web browsers, please refer to the documentation that came with the application for assistance. Troubleshooting Concepts The following list identifies important troubleshooting concepts and topics. The most common initialization and installation problems relate to IP addressing. For example, you must have valid IP addresses for both the AP-600 and the management computer to access the units HTTP interface.
IP Address management is fundamental. Factory default units are set for Dynamic (DHCP) IP Address assignment. The default IP address for the AP-600 is 169.254.128.132 if your network does not have a DHCP server. If you connect the AP-600 unit to a network with an active DHCP server, then use ScanTool to locate the IP address of your unit. If a DHCP server is not active on your subnet, then use ScanTool to assign a static IP address to the unit. The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) provides a means to download and upload files. These files include the AP-600 Image (executable program) and configuration files. If the AP-600 password is lost or forgotten, you will need to reset to default values. The Reset to Factory Default Procedure resets configuration, but does not change the current AP Image. If all else fails Use the Forced Reload Procedure to erase the current AP-600 Image and then download a new image. Once the new image is loaded, use the Reset to Factory Default Procedure to set the unit to factory default values and reconfigure the unit. The AP-600 Supports a Command Line Interface (CLI). If you are having trouble locating your AP-600 on the network, connect to the unit directly using the serial interface and refer to Command Line Interface (CLI) for CLI command syntax and parameter names.
81 Troubleshooting Symptoms and Solutions Connectivity Issues Connectivity issues include any problem that prevents you from powering up or connecting to the AP-600. AP-600 Unit Will Not Boot - No LED Activity 1. Make sure your power source is operating. 2. Make sure all cables are connected to the AP-600 correctly. 3. If you are using Active Ethernet, make sure you are using a Category 5, foiled, twisted pair cable to power the AP-600. Serial Link Does Not Work 1. Make sure you are using a standard, straight-through, 9-pin serial cable. 2. Double-check the physical network connections. 3. Make sure your PC terminal program (such as HyperTerminal) is active and configured to the following values:
Com Port: (COM1, COM2, etc. depending on your computer);
Baud rate: 9600; Data bits: 8; Stop bits: 1; Flow Control: None; Parity: None;
Line Feeds with Carriage Returns
(In HyperTerminal select:
File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup -> Send Line Ends with Line Feeds) Ethernet Link Does Not Work 1. Double-check the physical network connections. Use a known-good unit to make sure the network connection is present. Once you have the AP-600 IP address, you can use the Ping command over Ethernet to test the IP Address. If the AP-600 responds to the Ping, then the Ethernet Interface is working properly. 2. By default, the Access Point will attempt to automatically detect the Ethernet settings. However, if you are having problems with the Ethernet link, manually configure the Access Points Ethernet settings. For example, if your switch operates at 100 Mbits/sec/Full Duplex, manually configure the Access Point to use these settings (see Ethernet). If you cannot access the unit over Ethernet, then use the CLI interface over the serial port to configure the Ethernet port (see Command Line Interface (CLI) and Set Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode). 3. Perform network infrastructure troubleshooting (check switches, routers, etc.). Basic Software Setup and Configuration Problems Lost AP-600, Telnet, or SNMP Password 1. Perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure in this guide. This procedure resets system and network parameters, but does not affect the AP-600 Image. The default AP-600 HTTP password is public, and the default Telnet password is also public. Client Computer Cannot Connect 1. Client computers should have the same Network Name and security settings as the AP-600. 2. Network Names should be allocated and maintained by the Network Administrator. 3. Refer to the documentation that came with your client card for additional troubleshooting suggestions. AP-600 Has Incorrect IP Address 1. Default IP Address Assignment mode is dynamic (DHCP). If you do not have a DHCP server on your network, the default IP Address is 169.254.128.132. If you have more than one unintialized AP-600 connected to the network, they will all have the same default IP address and you will not be able to communicate with them (due to an IP address conflict). In this case, assign each AP a static IP address via the serial cable or turn off all units but one and change the IP address using ScanTool one at a time. 2. The AP-600 only contacts a DHCP server during boot-up. If your networks DHCP server is not available while the AP-600 is booting, the device will retain the last IP Address it had. Reboot the AP-600 once your DHCP server is on-line again or use the ScanTool to find the Access Points current IP address. 82 Troubleshooting 3. To find the units current IP address if using DHCP, open the IP Client Table in the DHCP Server and match the Access Points IP address to its MAC address (found on the product label). Alternatively, use ScanTool to identify an Access Points current IP address. 4. Once you have the current IP address, use the HTTP or CLI Interface to change the units IP settings, if necessary. 5. If you use static IP Address assignments, and cannot access the unit over Ethernet, use the Initializing the IP Address using CLI procedure. Once the IP Address is set, you can use the Ethernet Interface to complete configuration. 6. Perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure in this guide. This will reset the unit to DHCP mode. If there is a DHCP Server on the network, the DHCP Server will assign an IP Address to the AP-600. HTTP (browser) or Telnet Interface Does Not Work 1. Make sure you are using a compatible browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (preferred), or Netscape 4.x or later. 2. Make sure you have the proper IP address. Enter your Access Points IP Address in the browser address bar, similar to this example:
http://192.168.1.100 When the Enter Network Password window appears, leave the User Name field empty and enter the HTTP password in the Password field. The default HTTP password is public. 3. Use the CLI over the serial port to check the IP Access Table, which can be restricting access to Telnet and HTTP. HTML Help Files Do Not Appear 1. Verify that the HTML Help files are installed in the default directory:
2. C:\Program Files\ORiNOCO\AP600\Help\<language>
If the Help files are not located in this folder, contact your network administrator to find out where the Help files are located on your server. 3. Perform the following steps to verify the location or to enter the pathname for the Help files:
a. Click the Commands button in the HTTP interface. b. Select the Help tab located at the top of the screen. c. Enter the pathname where the Help files are located in the Help Link box. d. Click OK when finished. Telnet CLI Does Not Work 1. Make sure you have the proper IP Address. Enter your AP-600 IP address in the Telnet connection dialog, from a DOS prompt, type:
C:\> telnet <AP-600 IP Address>
2. Confirm that your computer has an IP address in the same IP subnet as your Access Point. 3. Use the CLI over the serial port to check the IP Access Table, which can be restricting access to Telnet and HTTP. TFTP Server Does Not Work 1. Make sure the TFTP Server has been started. 2. Verify the IP address of the TFTP Server. The server may be local or remote, so long as it has a valid IP address. 3. Configure the TFTP Server to point to the folder containing the file to be downloaded (or to the folder in which the file is to be uploaded). 4. Verify that you have entered the proper AP-600 Image file name (including the file extension) and directory path. 5. If you have a problem uploading a file, verify that the TFTP server is configured to allow uploads (typically the default setting is to allow only downloads). 83 Troubleshooting Client Connection Problems Client Software Finds No Connection Make sure you have configured your client software with the proper Network Name and Security settings. Network Names and WEP Keys are typically allocated and maintained by your network administrator. Client PC Card Does Not Work 1. Make sure you are using the latest PC Card driver software. 2. Download and install the latest ORiNOCO client software from http://www.proxim.com/support/. Intermittent Loss of Connection 1. Make sure you are within range of an active AP-600. 2. You can check the signal strength using the signal strength gauge on your ORiNOCO client software. If you are have an AP-600b, you can also use the Remote Link Test available in the Access Points HTTP interface. See Link Test (AP-600b Only). Client Does Not Receive an IP Address - Cannot Connect to Internet 1. 2. If the AP-600 is configured as a DHCP server, open the Web-browser Interface and select the Configure button and then the Network tab to make sure the proper DHCP settings are being used. If you are not using the DHCP server feature on the AP-600, then make sure that your local DHCP server is accessible from the Access Points subnet. 3. From the client computer, use the ping network command to test the connection with the AP-600. If the AP-600 responds, but you still cannot connect to the Internet, there may be a physical network configuration problem
(contact your network support staff). If using Active Ethernet, make sure you are not using a crossover Ethernet cable between the AP-600 and the hub. 4. Active Ethernet (AE) The AP-600 Does Not Work 1. Verify that you are using a standard UTP Category 5 cable. 2. Try a different port on the same AE hub (remember to move the input port accordingly) if it works, there is probably a faulty port or bad RJ-45 port connection. If possible, try to connect the AP-600 to a different AE hub. 3. 4. Try using a different Ethernet cable if it works, there is probably a faulty connection over the long cable, or a bad RJ-45 connection. 5. Check power plug and hub. 6. If the Ethernet link goes down, check the cable, cable type, switch, and hub. There Is No Data Link 1. Verify that the indicator for the port is on. 2. Verify that the AE hub is connected to the Ethernet network with a good connection. 3. Verify that the Ethernet cable is Category 5 or better and is less than 100 meters (approximately 325 feet) in length from the Ethernet source to the AP-600. 4. Try to connect a different device to the same port on the AE hub if it works and a link is established, there is probably a faulty data link in the AP-600. 5. Try to re-connect the AP-600 to a different output port (remember to move the input port accordingly) if it works, there is probably a faulty output or input port in the AE hub or a bad RJ-45 connection. Overload Indications 1. Verify that you are not using a cross-over cable between the AE output port and the AP-600. 2. Verify that there is no short over any of the twisted pair cables. 3. Move the device into a different output port if it works, there is probably a faulty port or bad RJ-45 connection. 84 Troubleshooting Recovery Procedures The most common installation problems relate to IP addressing. For example, without the TFTP server IP Address, you will not be able to download a new AP Image to the AP-600. IP Address management is fundamental. We suggest you create a chart to document and validate the IP addresses for your system. If the password is lost or forgotten, you will need to reset the AP-600 to default values. The Reset to Factory Default Procedure resets configuration settings, but does not change the current AP Image. If the AP-600 has a corrupted software image, follow the Forced Reload Procedure to erase the current AP Image and download a new image. Reset to Factory Default Procedure Use this procedure to reset the network configuration values, including the Access Points IP address and subnet mask. The current AP Image is not deleted. Follow this procedure if you forget the Access Points password:
1. Press and hold the RELOAD button for 10 seconds. 127(127(127(127(
See RELOAD and RESET Buttons to identify the buttons. You need to use a pin or the end of a paperclip to press a button. 2. Result: The AP-600 reboots, and the factory default network values are restored. If not using DHCP, use the ScanTool or CLI over a serial connection to set the IP address, subnet mask, and other IP parameters. See Command Line Interface (CLI) for CLI information. RESET RELOAD Figure 7-1 RELOAD and RESET Buttons 85 Troubleshooting Forced Reload Procedure Use this procedure to erase the current AP Image and download a new AP Image. In some cases, specifically when a missing or corrupted AP Image prevents successful booting, you may need to use ScanTool or the Bootloader CLI to download a new executable AP Image. 127(127(127(127(
This does not delete the AP-600s configuration (in other words, the Forced Reload Procedure does not reset to device to factory defaults). If you need to force the AP-600 to the factory default state after loading a new AP image, use the Reset to Factory Default Procedure above. For this procedure, you will first erase the AP Image currently installed on the unit and then use either ScanTool or the Bootloader CLI (over the serial port) to set the IP address and download a new AP Image. Follow these steps:
1. While the unit is running, press the RESET button. 127(127(127(127(
See RELOAD and RESET Buttons to identify the buttons. You need to use a pin or the end of a paperclip to press a button. Result: The AP-600 reboots and the indicators begin to flash.
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 By completing Step 2, the firmware in the AP-600 will be erased. You will need an Ethernet connection, a TFTP server, and a serial cable (if using the Bootloader CLI) to reload firmware. 2. Press and hold the RELOAD button for about 20 seconds until the POWER LED turns amber. Result: The AP-600 deletes the current AP Image. 3. Follow one of the procedures below to load a new AP Image to the Access Point:
Download a New Image Using ScanTool Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI Download a New Image Using ScanTool To download the AP Image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the computer on which the TFTP server resides and to a computer that is running ScanTool (this is either two separate computers connected to the same network or a single computer running both programs). ScanTool detects if an Access Point does not have a valid software image installed. In this case, the TFTP Server and Image File Name parameters are enabled in the ScanTools Change screen so you can download a new image to the unit. (These fields are grayed out if ScanTool does not detect a software image problem.) Preparing to Download the AP Image Before starting, you need to know the Access Points IP address, subnet mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the AP Image file name. Make sure the TFTP server is running and configured to point to the folder containing the image to be downloaded. Download Procedure Follow these steps to use ScanTool to download a software image to an Access Point with a missing image:
1. Download the latest software from http://www.proxim.com/support/. 2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server. 3. Launch ScanTool. 4. Highlight the entry for the AP-600 you want to update and click Change. 5. Set IP Address Type to Static. 127(127(127(127(
You need to assign static IP information temporarily to the Access Point since its DHCP client functionality is not available when no image is installed on the device. 6. Enter an unused IP address that is valid on your network in the IP Address field. You may need to contact your network administrator to get this address. 7. Enter the networks Subnet Mask in the field provided. 86 Troubleshooting 8. Enter the networks Gateway IP Address, if necessary. You may need to contact your network administrator to get this address. You should only need to enter the default gateway address if the Access Point and the TFTP server are separated by a router. 9. Enter the IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided. 10. Enter the Image File Name (including the file extension). Enter the full directory path and file name. If the file is located in the default TFTP directory, you need enter only the file name. 11. Click OK. Result: The Access Point will reboot and the download will begin automatically. You should see downloading activity begin after a few seconds within the TFTP servers status screen. 12. Click OK when prompted that the device has been updated successfully to return to the Scan List screen. 13. Click Cancel to close the ScanTool. 14. When the download process is complete, configure the AP-600 as described in Installation & Basic Configuration and Advanced Configuration. Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI To download the AP Image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the computer on which the TFTP server resides. This can be any computer on the LAN or connected to the AP-600 with a cross-over Ethernet cable. You must also connect the AP-600 to a computer with a standard serial cable and use a terminal client, such as HyperTerminal. From the terminal, enter CLI Commands to set the IP address and download an AP Image. Preparing to Download the AP Image Before starting, you need to know the Access Points IP address, subnet mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the AP Image file name. Make sure the TFTP server is running and configured to point to the folder containing the image to be downloaded. Download Procedure 1. Download the latest software from http://www.proxim.com/support/. 2. Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP servers default directory. 3. Use a straight-through serial cable to connect the Access Points serial port to your computers serial port. 127(127(127(127(
You must remove the Access Points cable cover and front cover to access the serial port. 4. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and set the following connection properties:
Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
Baud rate: 9600 Data Bits: 8 Stop bits: 1 Flow Control: None Parity: None 5. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the Send line ends with line feeds option. Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line of code. 6. Press the RESET button on the AP-600. Result: The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST) activity. After approximately 30 seconds, a message indicates: Sending Traps to SNMP manager periodically. After this message appears, press the ENTER key repeatedly until the following prompt appears:
[Device name]>
87 Troubleshooting 7. Enter only the following statements:
[Device name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device name]> set ipaddr <Access Point IP Address>
[Device name]> set ipsubmask <IP Mask>
[Device name]> set tftpipaddr <TFTP Server IP Address>
[Device name]> set tftpfilename <AP Image File Name, including file extension>
[Device name]> set ipgw <Gateway IP Address>
[Device name]> show ip (to confirm your new settings)
[Device name]> show tftp (to confirm your new settings)
[Device name]> reboot 0 Example:
[Device name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12
[Device name]> set ipsubmask 255.255.255.0
[Device name]> set tftpipaddr 10.0.0.20
[Device name]> set tftpfilename MyImage.bin
[Device name]> set ipgw 10.0.0.30
[Device name]> show ip
[Device name]> show tftp
[Device name]> reboot 0 Result: The AP-600 will reboot and then download the image file. You should see downloading activity begin after a few seconds within the TFTP servers status screen. 8. When the download process is complete, configure the AP-600 as described in Installation & Basic Configuration and Advanced Configuration. Setting IP Address using Serial Port and Normal CLI Use the following procedure to set an IP address over the serial port using the CLI. The network administrator typically provides the AP-600 IP address. Hardware and Software Requirements
Standard straight-through serial data (RS-232) cable with a one male DB-9 connector and one female DB-9 connector. The AP-600 comes with a female 9-pin serial port. ASCII Terminal software, such as HyperTerminal. Attaching the Serial Port Cable 1. Unlock and remove the cable cover from the AP-600. 2. Remove the front cover from the AP-600 to reveal the serial port. 3. Connect one end of the serial cable to the AP-600 and the other end to a serial port on your computer. 4. Power on the computer and AP-600, if necessary. Initializing the IP Address using CLI After installing the serial port cable, you may use the CLI to communicate with the AP-600. CLI supports most generic terminal emulation programs, such as HyperTerminal (which is included with the Windows operating systems). In addition, many web sites offer shareware or commercial terminal programs you can download. Once the IP address has been assigned, you can use the HTTP interface or the CLI over Telnet to complete configuration. Follow these steps to assign the AP-600 an IP address:
1. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and set the following connection properties:
Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
Baud rate: 9600 Data Bits: 8 Stop bits: 1 Flow Control: None Parity: None 88 Troubleshooting 2. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the Send line ends with line feeds option. Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line of code. 3. Press the RESET button on the AP-600 (see RELOAD and RESET Buttons to identify the location of the RESET button). Result: The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST) activity, and then displays a CLI prompt, similar to the example below. This process may take up to 90 seconds.
[Device name]> Please enter password:
4. Enter the CLI password (default is public). Result: The terminal displays a welcome message and then the CLI Prompt:
[Device name]>
5. Enter show ip. Result: Network parameters appear:
Figure 7-2 Result of show ip CLI Command 6. Change the IP address and other network values using set and reboot CLI commands, similar to the example below (use your own IP address and subnet mask). Note that IP Address Type is set to Dynamic by default. If you have a DHCP server on your network, you should not need to manually configure the Access Points IP address;
the Access Point will obtain an IP address from the networks DHCP server during boot-up. Result: After each entry the CLI reminds you to reboot; however wait to reboot until all commands have been entered.
[Device name]> set ipaddrtype static
[Device name]> set ipaddr <IP Address>
[Device name]> set ipsubmask <IP Subnet Mask>
[Device name]> set ipgw <Default Gateway IP Address>
[Device name]> show ip (to confirm your new settings)
[Device name]> reboot 0 7. After the AP-600 reboots, verify the new IP address by reconnecting to the CLI and enter a show ip command. Alternatively, you can ping the AP-600 from a network computer to confirm that the new IP address has taken effect. 8. When the proper IP address is set, use the HTTP interface or CLI over Telnet to configure the rest of the units operating parameters. 89 Troubleshooting System Alarms (Traps) Security Alarms oriTrapAuthenticationFailure A client has failed to authenticate using one of the following authentication methods: MAC Access Control Table, RADIUS MAC Authentication, or 802.1x Authentication (for 802.1x, EAP type is specified) oriTrapUnauthorizedManagerDetected An unauthorized manager has attempted to view and/or modify parameters Wireless Interface Card Alarms oriTrapWLCNotPresent oriTrapWLCFailure riTrapWLCRemoval oriTrapWLCIncompatibleFirmware oriTrapWLCVoltageDiscrepancy oriTrapWLCIncompatibleVendor oriTrapWLCFirmwareDownloadFailure Wireless radio firmware download failure detected Wireless radio not present Wireless radio general failure Wireless radio removal Wireless radio incompatible firmware detected Wireless radio voltage discrepancy detected Wireless radio incompatible vendor detected Operational Alarms oriTrapWatchDogTimerExpired oriTrapRADIUSServerNotResponding oriTrapModuleNotInitialized oriTrapDeviceRebooting oriTrapTaskSuspended oriTrapBootPFailed oriTrapDHCPFailed Watch Dog Timer has expired RADIUS Server is not responding or error communicating with RADIUS Server Module has not been initialized Device is rebooting Task suspension has been detected BootP failure detected (no response from BootP Server) DHCP Client failure detected (no response from DHCP server) FLASH Memory Alarms oriTrapFlashMemoryEmpty oriTrapFlashMemoryCorrupted Flash memory empty Flash memory data corrupted TFTP Alarms oriTrapTFTPFailedOperation oriTrapTFTPOperationInitiated oriTrapTFTPOperationCompleted TFTP (upload or download) failure detected TFTP (upload or download) operation initiated TFTP (upload or download) operation completed Image Alarms oriTrapZeroSizeImage oriTrapInvalidImage oriTrapImageTooLarge oriTrapIncompatibleImage Zero size image has been downloaded to device Invalid image has been downloaded to device Image downloaded to device is too big Incompatible image has been downloaded to device Standard MIB-II (RFC 1213) Alarms coldStart linkUp linkDown Device has been turned on or rebooted Device Link is up (Ethernet interface is up) Device Link is down (Ethernet interface is down) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) Alarms newRoot topologyChange New root has been added to Bridge Network Topology change has been detected 90 Troubleshooting Related Applications RADIUS Authentication Server If you enabled RADIUS Authentication on the AP-600, make sure that your networks RADIUS servers are operational. Otherwise, clients will not be able to log in. There are several reasons the authentication server services might be unavailable, here are two typical things to check:
Make sure you have the proper RADIUS authentication server information setup configured in the AP-600. Check the RADIUS Authentication Servers Shared Secret and Destination Port number (default is 1812; for RADIUS Accounting, the default is 1813).
Make sure the RADIUS authentication server RAS setup matches the AP-600. TFTP Server The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server allows you to transfer files across a network. You can upload configuration files from the AP-600 for backup or copying, and you can download configuration files or new software images. The TFTP software is located on the ORiNOCO AP-600 Installation CD-ROM. If a TFTP server is not configured and running, you will not be able to download and upload images and configuration files to/from the AP-600. Remember that the TFTP server does not have to be local, so long as you have a valid TFTP IP address. Note that you do not need a TFTP server running unless you want to transfer files to or from the AP-600. After the TFTP server is installed:
Check to see that TFTP is configured to point to the directory containing the AP Image.
Make sure you have the proper TFTP server IP Address, the proper AP Image file name, and that the TFTP server is connected.
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWKVHQGDQGUHFHLYHZLWKQRWLPHRXW
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWKVHQGDQGUHFHLYHZLWKQRWLPHRXW
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWKVHQGDQGUHFHLYHZLWKQRWLPHRXW
0DNHVXUHWKH7)73VHUYHULVFRQILJXUHGWRERWKVHQGDQGUHFHLYHZLWKQRWLPHRXW
91 Troubleshooting 92 Command Line Interface (CLI) A In This Appendix This section describes the AP-600s Command Line (CLI) Interface. CLI commands can be used to initialize, configure, and manage the Access Point. CLI commands may be entered in real time through a keyboard or submitted with CLI scripts. The CLI is available through both the Serial Port interface and over the Ethernet interface using Telnet. 127(127(127(127(
All CLI commands and parameters are case-sensitive.
General Notes
Command Line Interface (CLI) Variations
CLI Command Types
Using Tables & User Strings
Configuring the AP-600 using CLI commands
Other Network Settings
CLI Monitoring Parameters
Parameter Tables Set Basic Configuration Parameters using CLI Commands General Notes Prerequisite Skills and Knowledge To use this document effectively, you should have a working knowledge of Local Area Networking (LAN) concepts, network access infrastructures, and client-server relationships. In addition, you should be familiar with software setup procedures for typical network operating systems and servers. Notation Conventions
Computer prompts are shown as constant width type. For example: [Device name]>
Information that you input as shown is displayed in bold constant width type. For example:
[Device name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12 The names of keyboard keys, software buttons, and field names are displayed in bold type. For example: Click the Configure button. Screen names are displayed in bold italics. For example, the System Status screen.
Important Terminology
Configuration Files - Database files containing the current Access Point configuration. Configuration items include the IP Address and other network-specific values. Config files may be downloaded to the Access Point or uploaded for backup or troubleshooting.
Download vs. Upload - Downloads transfer files to the Access Point. Uploads transfer files from the Access Point. The TFTP server performs file transfers in both directions. 92 Command Line Interface (CLI)
Group - A logical collection of network parameter information. For example, the System Group is composed of several related parameters. Groups can also contain Tables. All items for a given Group can be displayed with a show <Group> CLI Command. Image File - The Access Point software executed from RAM. To update an Access Point you typically download a new Image File. This file is often referred to as the AP Image. Parameter - A fundamental network value that can be displayed and may be changeable. For example, the Access Point must have a unique IP Address and the Wireless interface must be assigned an SSID. Change parameters with the CLI set Command, and view them with the CLI show Command. Table - Tables hold parameters for several related items. For example, you can add several potential managers to the SNMP Table. All items for a given Table can be displayed with a show <Table> CLI Command. TFTP - Refers to the TFTP Server, used for file transfers.
Navigation and Special Keys This CLI supports the following navigation and special key functions to move the cursor along the prompt line. Operation Key Combination Delete or Backspace Delete previous character Ctrl-A Ctrl-E Ctrl-F Ctrl-B Ctrl-D Ctrl-U Ctrl-P Ctrl-N Tab
Move cursor to beginning of line Move cursor to end of line Move cursor forward one character Move cursor back one character Delete the character the cursor is on Delete all text to left of cursor Go to the previous line in the history buffer Go to the next line in the history buffer Complete the command line List available commands CLI Error Messages The following table describes the error messages associated with improper inputs or expected CLI behavior. Error Message Syntax error Invalid command Invalid parameter name Invalid parameter value Invalid table index Invalid table parameter Invalid table parameter value Read only parameter Incorrect password Download unsuccessful Upload unsuccessful Description Invalid syntax entered at the command prompt. A non-existent command has been entered at the command prompt. An invalid parameter name has been entered at the command prompt. An invalid parameter value has been entered at the command prompt. An invalid table index has been entered at the command prompt. An invalid table parameter has been entered at the command prompt. An invalid table parameter value has been entered at the command prompt. User is attempting to configure a read-only parameter. An incorrect password has been entered in the CLI login prompt. The download operation has failed due to incorrect TFTP server IP Address or file name. The upload operation has failed due to incorrect TFTP server IP Address or file name. Command Line Interface (CLI) Variations Administrators use the CLI to control Access Point operation and monitor network statistics. The AP-600 supports two types of CLI: the Bootloader CLI and the normal CLI. The Bootloader CLI provides a limited command set, and is used when the current AP Image is bad or missing. The Bootloader CLI allows you to assign an IP Address and download a new image. Once the image is downloaded and running, the Access Point uses the normal CLI. This guide covers the normal CLI unless otherwise specified. 93 Command Line Interface (CLI) Bootloader CLI The Bootloader CLI is a minimal subset of the normal CLI used to perform initial configuration of the AP-600. This interface is only accessible via the serial interface if the AP-600 does not contain a software image or a download image command over TFTP has failed. The Bootloader CLI provides you with the ability to configure the initial setup parameters as well as download a software image to the device. The following functions are supported by the Bootloader CLI:
configuration of initial device parameters using the set command show command to view the devices configuration parameters help command to provide additional information on all commands supported by the Bootloader CLI reboot command to reboot the device The parameters supported by the Bootloader CLI (for viewing and modifying) are:
System Name IP Address Assignment Type IP Address IP Mask Gateway IP Address TFTP Server IP Address Image File Name (including the file extension) The following lists display the results of using the help command in the Bootloader CLI:
Figure A-1 Results of help bootloader CLI command The following lists display the results of using the show command in the Bootloader CLI:
Figure A-2 Results of show bootloader CLI command 94 Command Line Interface (CLI) CLI Command Types This guide divides CLI Commands into two categories: Operational and Parameter Controls. Operational CLI Commands These commands affect Access Point behavior, such as downloading, rebooting, and so on. After entering commands
(and parameters, if any) press the Enter key to execute the Command Line. Operational commands include:
?: Typing a question mark lists CLI Commands or parameters, depending on usage (you do not need to type Enter after typing this command) done, exit, quit: Terminates the CLI session download: Uses TFTP server to download image, config, or bootloader upgrade files to Access Point help: Displays general CLI help information or command help information, such as command usage and syntax history: Remembers commands to help avoid re-entering complex statements passwd: Sets the Access Points CLI password reboot: Reboots the Access Point in the specified time search: Lists the parameters in a specified Table upload: Uses TFTP server to upload config files from Access Point to TFTP default directory or specified path
? (List Commands) This command can be used in a number of ways to display available commands and parameters. The following table lists each operation and provides a basic example. Following the table are detailed examples and display results for each operation. Operation Display the Command List (Example 1) Display commands that start with specified letters (Example 2) Display parameters for set and show Commands (Examples 3a and 3b) Prompt to enter successive parameters for Commands (Example 4) Basic Example
[Device Name]>?
[Device Name]>s?
[Device Name]>set ?
[Device Name]>show ipa?
[Device Name]>download ?
Example 1. Display Command list To display the Command List, enter ?.
[Device Name]>?
Figure A-3 Result of ? CLI command Example 2. Display specific Commands To show all commands that start with specified letters, enter one or more letters, then ? with no space between letters and ?.
[Device Name]>s?
Figure A-4 Result of s? CLI command 95 Command Line Interface (CLI) Example 3. Display parameters for set and show Example 3a allows you to see every possible parameter for the set (or show) commands. Notice from example 3a that the list is very long. Example 3b shows how to display a subset of the parameters based on initial parameter letters. Example 3a. Display every parameter that can be changed
[Device Name]>set ?
. Figure A-5 Result of set ? CLI command Example 3b. Display parameters based on letter sequence This example shows entries for parameters that start with the letter i. The more letters you enter, the fewer the results returned. Notice that there is no space between the letters and the question mark.
[Device Name]> show ipa?
Figure A-6 Result of show ipa? CLI command
[Device Name]> show iparp?
Figure A-7 Result of show iparp? CLI command 96 Command Line Interface (CLI) Example 4. Display Prompts for Successive Parameters Enter the command, a space, and then ?. Then, when the parameter prompt appears, enter the parameter value. Result: The parameter is changed and a new CLI line is echoed with the new value (in the first part of the following example, the value is the IP Address of the TFTP server). After entering one parameter, you may add another ? to the new CLI line to see the next parameter prompt, and so on until you have entered all of the required parameters. The following example shows how this is used for the download Command. The last part of the example shows the completed download Command ready for execution.
[Device Name]> download ?
<TFTP IP Address>
[Device Name]> download 169.254.128.133 ?
<File Name>
[Device Name]> download 169.254.128.133 apimage ?
<file type (config/img/bootloader)>
[Device Name]> download 169.254.128.133 apimage img <CR>
done, exit, quit Each of the following commands ends a CLI session:
[Device Name]> done
[Device Name]> exit
[Device Name]> quit download Downloads the specified file from a TFTP server to the Access Point. Executing download in combination with the asterisks character (*) will make use of the previously set TFTP parameters. Executing download without parameters will display command help and usage information. 1. Syntax to download a file:
Device Name]>download <tftp server address> <path and filename> <file type>
Example:
[Device Name]>download 192.168.1.100 APImage2 img 2. Syntax to display help and usage information:
[Device Name]>download 3. Syntax to execute the download Command using previously set (stored) TFTP Parameters:
[Device Name]>download *
help Displays instructions on using control-key sequences for navigating a Command Line and displays command information and examples. 1. Using help as the only argument:
[Device Name]>help 97 Command Line Interface (CLI) Figure A-8 Results of help CLI command 2. Complete command description and command usage can be provided by:
[Device Name]>help <command name>
[Device Name]><command name> help history Shows content of Command History Buffer. The Command History Buffer stores command statements entered in the current session. To avoid re-entering long command statements, use the keyboard up arrow (Ctrl-P) and down arrow (Ctrl-N) keys to recall previous statements from the Command History Buffer. When the desired statement reappears, press the Enter key to execute, or you may edit the statement before executing it.
[Device Name]> history passwd Changes the CLI Password.
[Device Name]> passwd oldpassword newpassword newpassword reboot Reboots Access Point after specified number of seconds. Specify a value of 0 (zero) for immediate reboot.
[Device Name]> reboot 0
[Device Name]> reboot 30 search Lists the parameters supported by the specified table. This list corresponds to the table information displayed in the HTTP interface. In this example, the CLI returns the list of parameters that make up an entry in the IP Access Table.
[Device Name]> search mgmtipaccesstbl Figure A-9 Results of search mgmtipaccesstbl CLI command 98 Command Line Interface (CLI) upload Uploads a text-based configuration file from the AP-600 to the TFTP Server. Executing upload with the asterisk character (*) will make use of the previously set/stored TFTP parameters. Executing upload without parameters will display command help and usage information. 1. Syntax to upload a file:
[Device Name]>upload <tftp server address> <path and filename> <filetype>
Example:
[Device Name]>upload 192.168.1.100 APconfig.sys config 2. Syntax to display help and usage information:
[Device Name]>help upload 3. Syntax to execute the upload command using previously set (stored) TFTP Parameters:
[Device Name]>upload *
Parameter Control Commands The following sections cover the two Parameter Control Commands (show and set) and include several tables showing parameter properties. These commands allow you to view (show) all parameters and statistics and to change
(set) parameters.
show: To see any Parameter or Statistic value, you can specify a single parameter, a Group, or a Table. set: Use this CLI Command to change parameter values. You can use a single CLI statement to modify Tables, or you can modify each parameter separately. show CLI Command Displays the value of the specified parameter, or displays all parameter values of a specified group (parameter table). Groups contain Parameters and Tables. Tables contain parameters for a series of similar entities. To see a definition and syntax example, type only show and then press the Enter key. To see a list of available parameters, enter a question mark (?) after show (example: show ?). Syntax:
[Device Name]>show <parameter>
[Device Name]>show <group>
[Device Name]>show <table>
Examples:
[Device Name]>show ipaddr
[Device Name]>show network
[Device Name]>show mgmtipaccesstbl set CLI Command Sets (modifies) the value of the specified parameter. To see a definition and syntax example, type only set and then press the Enter key. To see a list of available parameters, enter a space, then a question mark (?) after set (example:
set?). Syntax:
[Device Name]>set <parameter> <value>
[Device Name]>set <table> <index> <argument 1> <value 1> ... <argument N> <value N>
Example:
[Device Name]>set sysloc Main Lobby
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 submask 255.255.0.0 Configuring Objects that Require Reboot Certain objects supported by the Access Point require a device reboot in order for the changes to take effect. In order to inform the end-user of this behavior, the CLI provides informational messages when the user has configured an object that requires a reboot. The following messages are displayed as a result of the configuring such object or objects. 99 Command Line Interface (CLI) Example 1: Configuring objects that require the device to be rebooted The following message is displayed every time the user has configured an object that requires the device to be rebooted.
[Device Name]>set ipaddr 135.114.73.10 The following elements require reboot ipaddr Example 2: Executing the exit, quit, or done commands when an object that requires reboot has been configured In addition to the above informational message, the CLI also provides a message as a result of the exit, quit, or done command if changes have been made to objects that require reboot. If you make changes to objects that require reboot and execute the exit command the following message is displayed:
[Device Name]>exit<CR> OR quit<CR> OR done<CR>
Modifications have been made to parameters that require the device to be rebooted. These changes will only take effect after the next reboot. set and show Command Examples In general, you will use the CLI show Command to view current parameter values and use the CLI set Command to change parameter values. As shown in the following examples, parameters may be set individually or all parameters for a given table can be set with a single statement. Example 1 - Set the Access Point IP Address Parameter Syntax:
[Device Name]>set <parameter name> <parameter value>
Example:
[Device Name]> set ipaddr 10.0.0.12 Result: IP Address will be changed when you reboot the Access Point. The CLI reminds you when rebooting is required for a change to take effect. To reboot immediately, enter reboot 0 (zero) at the CLI prompt. Example 2 - Create a table entry or row Use 0 (zero) as the index to a table when creating an entry. When creating a table row, only the mandatory table elements are required (comment is usually an optional table element). For optional table elements, the default value is generally applied if you do not specify a value. Syntax:
[Device Name]>set <table name> <table index> <element 1> <value 1>
<element n> <value n>
Example:
[Device Name]> set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 ipmask 255.255.0.0 Result: A new table entry is created for IP address 10.0.0.10 with a 255.255.0.0 subnet mask. Example 3 - Modify a table entry or row Use the index to be modified and the table elements you would like to modify. For example, suppose the IP Access Table has one entry and you wanted to modify the IP address:
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.11 You can also modify several elements in the table entry. Enter the index number and specific table elements you would like to modify. (Hint: Use the search Command to see the elements that belong to the table.)
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 1 ipaddr 10.0.0.12 ipmask 255.255.255.248 cmt First Row 100 Command Line Interface (CLI) Example 4 - Enable, Disable, or Delete a table entry or row The following example illustrates how to manage the second entry in a table. Syntax:
[Device Name]>set <Table> index status <enable, disable, delete>
[Device Name]>set <Table> index status <1=enable, 2=disable, 3=delete>
Example:
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status enable
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status disable
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status delete
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 2 status 2 127(127(127(127(
You may need to enable a disabled table entry before you can change the entrys elements. Example 5 - Show the Group Parameters This example illustrates how to view all elements of a group or table. Syntax:
[Device Name]> show <group name>
Example:
[Device Name]>show network Result: The CLI displays network group parameters. Note show network and show ip return the same data. Figure A-10 Results of show network and show ip CLI Commands Example 6 - Show Individual and Table Parameters 1. View a single parameter. Syntax:
[Device Name]>show <parameter name>
Example:
[Device Name]> show ipaddr Result: Displays the Access Point IP address. Figure A-11 Result of show ipaddr CLI Command 101 Command Line Interface (CLI) 2. View all parameters in a table. Syntax:
[Device Name]> show <table name>
Example:[Device Name]> show mgmtipaccesstbl Result: Displays the IP Access Table and its entries. Using Tables & User Strings Working with Tables Each table element (or parameter) must be specified, as in the example below.
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl 0 ipaddr 10.0.0.10 ipmask 255.255.0.0 Below are the rules for creating, modifying, enabling/disabling, and deleting table entries.
Creation The table name is required. The table index is required for table entry/instance creation the index is always zero (0). The order in which the table arguments or objects are entered in not important. Parameters that are not required can be omitted, in which case they will be assigned the default value.
Modification If multiple table objects are to be modified the order in which they are entered is not important. If the entire table entry is to be modified, all the table objects have to be specified. The table name is required. The table index is required to modify the table, index must be the index of the entry to be modified. Only the table objects that are to be modified need to be specified. Not all the table objects are required. Enabling/Disabling The table name is required. The table index is required for table enabling/disabling the index should be the index of the entry to be enabled/disabled. The entrys new state (either enable or disable) is required.
Deletion The table name is required. The table index is required for table deletion the index should be the index of the entry to be deleted. The word delete is required. Using Strings Since there are several string objects supported by the AP-600, a string delimiter is required for the strings to be interpreted correctly by the command line parser. For this CLI implementation, the single quote or double quote character can be used at the beginning and at the end of the string. For example:
[Device Name]> set sysname Lobby - Does not need quote marks
[Device Name]> set sysname Front Lobby - Requires quote marks. The scenarios supported by this CLI are:
My Desk in Nieuwegein My Desk in Nieuwegein My Desk in Nieuwegein My Desk in Nieuwegein Daniels Desk in Nieuwegein Daniels Desk in Nieuwegein Double Quotes Single Quotes Single Quotes within Double Quotes Double Quotes within Single Quotes One Single Quote within Double Quotes One Double Quote within Single Quotes The string delimiter does not have to be used for every string object. The single quote or double quote only has to be used for string objects that contain blank space characters. If the string object being used does not contain blank spaces, then the string delimiters, single or double quotes, mentioned in this section are not required. 102 Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuring the AP-600 using CLI commands Log into the AP-600 using HyperTerminal 1. Open your terminal emulation program (like HyperTerminal) and set the following connection properties:
Com Port: <COM1, COM2, etc., depending on your computer>
Baud rate: 9600 Data Bits: 8 Stop bits: 1 Flow Control: None Parity: None 2. Under File -> Properties -> Settings -> ASCII Setup, enable the Send line ends with line feeds option. Result: HyperTerminal sends a line return at the end of each line of code. 3. Enter the CLI password (default is public). 127(127(127(127(
Proxim recommends changing your default passwords immediately. To perform this operation using CLI commands, refer to Change Passwords. Log into the AP-600 using Telnet The CLI commands can be used to access, configure, and manage the AP-600 using Telnet. Follow these steps:
1. Confirm that your computers IP address is in the same IP subnet as the AP-600. 127(127(127(127(
If you have not previously configured the Access Points IP address and do not have a DHCP server on the network, the Access Point will default to an IP address of 169.254.128.132. 2. Go to the DOS command prompt on your computer. 3. Type telnet <IP Address of the unit>. 4. Enter the CLI password (default is public). 127(127(127(127(
Proxim recommends changing your default passwords immediately. To perform this operation using CLI commands, refer to Change Passwords. Set Basic Configuration Parameters using CLI Commands There are a few basic configuration parameters that you may want to setup right away when you receive the AP-600. For example:
Set System Name, Location and Contact Information Set Static IP Address for the AP-600 Download an AP-600 Configuration File from your TFTP Server Set Network Names for the Wireless Interface Set WEP Encryption for the Wireless Interface Download an AP-600 Configuration File from your TFTP Server Backup your AP-600 Configuration File Set System Name, Location and Contact Information
[Device Name]>set sysname <system name> sysloc <Unit Location>
[Device Name]>set sysctname <Contact Name (person responsible for system)>
[Device Name]>set sysctphone <Contact Phone Number> sysctemail <Contact E-mail address>
[Device Name]>show system 103 Command Line Interface (CLI) Figure A-12 Result of show system CLI Command Set Static IP Address for the AP-600 127(127(127(127(
The IP Subnet Mask of the AP-600 must match your networks Subnet Mask.
[Device Name]>set ipaddrtype static
[Device Name]>set ipaddr <fixed IP address of unit>
[Device Name]>set ipsubmask <IP Mask (default = 255.0.0.0)>
[Device Name]>set ipgw <gateway IP address (default = 169.254.128.133)>
[Device Name]>show network Change Passwords
[Device Name]>passwd <Old Password> <New Password> <Confirm Password> (CLI password)
[Device Name]>set httppasswd <New Password> (HTTP interface password)
[Device Name]>set snmprpasswd <New Password> (SNMP read password)
[Device Name]>set snmprwpasswd <New Password> (SNMP read/write)
[Device Name]>reboot 0
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Proxim strongly urges you to change the default passwords to restrict access to your network devices to authorized personnel. If you lose or forget your password settings, you can always perform the Reset to Factory Default Procedure. Set Network Names for the Wireless Interface
[Device Name]>set wif 3 netname <Network Name (SSID) for wireless interface>
[Device Name]>show wif Figure A-13 Results of show wif CLI command for an AP-600a 104 Command Line Interface (CLI) Set WEP Encryption for the Wireless Interface
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Wireless clients must be configured with the same encryption key to be able to communicate with the AP-600. The AP-600 can only support one Key Length (so each of the configured keys must have the same length). The available key sizes vary based on the Access Points model. See Security Encryption Key Length Table for more information. You can set up to four encryption keys. This example describes setting encryption Key 1 on the wireless card in Slot A.
[Device Name]>set wifsec 3 encryptstatus enable encryptkey1 <WEP key (number of characters
[Device Name]>show wifsec vary depending on AP model)> encryptkeytx 1 Figure A-14 Result of show wifsec CLI Command Download an AP-600 Configuration File from your TFTP Server Begin by starting your TFTP program. It must be running and configured to transmit and receive.
[Device Name]>set tftpfilename <file name> tftpfiletype config tftpipaddr <IP address of your TFTP server>
[Device Name]>show tftp (to ensure the filename, file type, and the IP address are correct)
[Device Name]>download *
[Device Name]>reboot 0 After following the complete process (above) once, you can download a file of the same name (so long as all the other parameters are the same), with the following command:
[Device Name]>download *
Backup your AP-600 Configuration File Begin by starting your TFTP program. It must be running and configured to transmit and receive.
[Device Name]>upload <TFTP Server IP address> <tftpfilename (such as config.sys)> config
[Device Name]>show tftp (to ensure the filename, file type, and the IP address are correct) After setting the TFTP parameters, you can backup your current file (so long as all the other parameters are the same), with the following command:
[Device Name]>upload *
105 Other Network Settings There are other configuration settings that you may want to set for the AP-600. Some of them are listed below. Command Line Interface (CLI) Configure the AP-600 as a DHCP Server Configure the DNS Client Maintain Client Connections using Link Integrity Change your Wireless Interface Settings Set Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode Set Interface Management Services Configure MAC Access Control Set RADIUS Parameters 127(127(127(127(
Refer to Advanced Configuration for more information on these settings. Configure the AP-600 as a DHCP Server 127(127(127(127(
You must have at least one entry in the DHCP Server IP Address Pool Table before you can set the DHCP Server Status to Enable.
[Device Name]>set dhcpstatus disable
[Device Name]>set dhcpippooltbl 0 startipaddr <start ip address>
endipaddr <end ip address>
[Device Name]>set dhcpgw <gateway ip address>
[Device Name]>set dhcppridnsipaddr <primary dns ip address>
[Device Name]>set dhcpsecdnsipaddr <secondary dns ip address>
[Device Name]>set dhcpstatus enable
[Device Name]>reboot 0
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21
&$87,21 Before enabling this feature, confirm that the IP address pools you have configured are valid addresses on the network and do not overlap the addresses assigned by any other DHCP server on the network. Enabling this feature with incorrect address pools will cause problems on your network. Configure the DNS Client
[Device Name]>set dnsstatus enable
[Device Name]>set dnsprisvripaddr <IP address of primary DNS server>
[Device Name]>set dnssecsvripaddr <IP address of secondary DNS server>
[Device Name]>set dnsdomainname <default domain name>
[Device Name]>show dns Figure A-15 Results of show dns CLI command 106 Command Line Interface (CLI) Maintain Client Connections using Link Integrity
[Device Name]>show linkinttbl (this shows the current links)
[Device Name]>set linkinttbl <1-5 (depending on what table row you wish to address)>
ipaddr <ip address of the host computer you want to check>
[Device Name]>set linkintpollint <the interval between link integrity checks>
[Device Name]>set linkintpollretx <number of times to retransmit before considering the link down>
[Device Name]>set linkintstatus enable
[Device Name]>show linkinttbl (confirm new settings)
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Change your Wireless Interface Settings See Wireless (AP-600a) or Wireless (AP-600b) for information on the parameters listed below. Autochannel Select (ACS) ACS is enabled by default. Reboot after disabling or enabling ACS.
[Device Name]>set wif 3 autochannel <enable/disable>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Enable 2X Turbo Mode (AP-600a Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 turbo <enable/disable>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Enable/Disable Interference Robustness (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 interrobust <enable/disable>
Enable/Disable Closed System (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 closedsys <enable/disable>
127(127(127(127(
When disabled, a client configured with the Network Name ANY can connect to the AP-600b. This feature is not currently available for the AP-600a. Enable/Disable Load Balancing (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 ldbalance <enable/disable>
Enable/Disable Medium Density Distribution (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 meddendistrib <enable/disable>
107 Command Line Interface (CLI) Set the Distance Between APs (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 distaps <large, medium, small, minicell, microcell>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 127(127(127(127(
The distance between APs should not be approximated. It is calculated by means of a manual Site Survey, in which an AP-600 is set up and clients are tested throughout the area to determine signal strength and coverage, and local limits such as physical interference are investigated. From these measurements the appropriate cell size and density is determined, and the optimum distance between APs is calculated to suit your particular business requirements. Set the Multicast Rate (AP-600b Only)
[Device Name]>set wif 3 multrate <1,2,5.5,11 (Mbits/sec)>
127(127(127(127(
The Distance Between APs must be set before the Multicast Rate. Set Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode
[Device Name]>set etherspeed <value (see below)>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Ethernet Speed and Transmission Mode 10 Mbits/sec - half duplex 10 Mbits/sec - full duplex 10 Mbits/sec - auto duplex 100 Mbits/sec - half duplex 100 Mbits/sec - full duplex Auto Speed - half duplex Auto Speed - auto duplex Value 10halfduplex 10fullduplex 10autoduplex 100halfduplex 100fullduplex autohalfduplex autoautoduplex (default) Set Interface Management Services Edit Management IP Access Table
[Device Name]>set mgmtipaccesstbl <index> ipaddr <IP address> ipmask <subnet mask>
Configure Management Ports
[Device Name]>set snmpifbitmask <0 - 7 (default is 7 see below)>
[Device Name]>set httpifbitmask <0 - 7 (default is 7 see below)>
[Device Name]>set telifbitmask <0 - 7 (default is 7 see below)>
Choose from the following values:
Interface bitmask 0 or 2 = disable (all interfaces) 1 or 3 = Ethernet only 4 or 6 = Wireless only 5 or 7 = all interfaces Description All management channels disabled Ethernet only enabled Wireless only enabled All management channels enabled Set Communication Ports
[Device Name]>set httpport <HTTP port number (default is 80)>
[Device Name]>set telport <Telnet port number (default is 23)>
108 Command Line Interface (CLI) Set Telnet Session Timeouts
[Device Name]>set tellogintout <time in seconds between 1 and 300 (default is 30)>
[Device Name]>set telsessiontout <time in seconds between 1 and 36000 (default is 900)>
Configure Serial Port Interface 127(127(127(127(
To avoid unexpected performance issues, leave Flow Control at the default setting (none) unless you are sure what this setting should be.
[Device Name]>set serbaudrate <2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600>
[Device Name]>set serflowctrl <none, xon/xoff>
[Device Name]>show serial Figure A-16 Result of show serial CLI Command Configure Syslog
[Device Name]>set syslogpriority <1-7 (default is 6)>
[Device Name]>set syslogstatus <enable/disable>
Configure Intra BSS
[Device Name]>set intrabssoptype <passthru (default)/block)>
Configure MAC Access Control Setup MAC (Address) Access Control
[Device Name]>set macaclstatus enable
[Device Name]>set macacloptype <passthru, block>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Add an Entry to the MAC Access Control Table
[Device Name]>set macacltbl <index> macaddr <MAC Address> status enable
[Device Name]>show macacltbl Disable or Delete an Entry in the MAC Access Control Table
[Device Name]>set macacltbl <index> status <disable/delete>
[Device Name]>show macacltbl 127(127(127(127(
For larger networks that include multiple Access Points, you may prefer to maintain this list on a centralized location using the RADIUS parameters (see Set RADIUS Parameters). 109 Command Line Interface (CLI) Configure 802.1x Authentication
[Device Name]>set secconfig <none, 802.1x, mixed>
[Device Name]>set secenckeylentbl 3 enckeylen <64bits, 128bits, 152bits (152 bits available with AP-600a only)>
[Device Name]>set secrekeyint <60 65535 seconds; default is 900 sec>
[Device Name]>reboot 0 127(127(127(127(
If you set Security to 802.1x or Mixed, you also need to configure the RADIUS parameters. If you set Security to Mixed, you also need to configure WEP Encryption settings. See 802.1x for details. Set RADIUS Parameters Configure RADIUS Authentication server
[Device Name]>set radiustbl <index> status enable seraddrfmt <ipaddr or name>
ipaddr <RADIUS IP address or name> port <user defined>
ssecret <user defined> responsetm <1 to 4 seconds>
maxretx <1 to 10 times>
[Device Name]>show radiustbl Figure A-17 Results of show radiustbl CLI command Enable RADIUS MAC Access Control
[Device Name]>set radmacaccctrl enable
[Device Name]>reboot 0 Set MAC Address Format Type
[Device Name]>set radmacaddrformat <dashdelimited, colondelimited, singledashdelimited, nodelimiter>
Set Authentication Lifetime
[Device Name]>set radauthlifetm <60-43200 seconds; default is 900>
Enable RADIUS Accounting
[Device Name]>set radaccstatus enable
[Device Name]>set radaccinactivetmr <inactivity timer in minutes>
[Device Name]>show radius 110 Command Line Interface (CLI) Figure A-18 Result of show radius CLI Command Configure RADIUS Accounting server
[Device Name]>set radacctbl <index> status <enable> seraddrfmt <ipaddr or name> ipaddr
<RADIUS IP address or name> port <user defined> ssecret <user defined>
responsetm <1 to 4 seconds> maxretx <1 to 10 times>
[Device Name]>show radacctbl Figure A-19 Results of show radacctbl CLI command CLI Monitoring Parameters Using the show command with the following table parameters will display operating statistics for the AP-600 (these are the same statistics that are described in Monitor Information for the HTTP Web interface). staticmp: Displays the ICMP Statistics. statarptbl: Displays the IP ARP Table Statistics. statbridgetbl: Displays the Learn Table. statiapp: Displays the IAPP Statistics. statradius: Displays the RADIUS Authentication Statistics. statif: Displays information and statistics about the Ethernet and wireless interfaces. stat802.11: Displays additional statistics for the wireless interfaces. statethernet: Displays additional statistics for the Ethernet interface. 111 Command Line Interface (CLI) Parameter Tables Objects contain groups that contain both parameters and parameter tables. Use the following Tables to configure the Access Point. Columns used on the tables include:
Name - Parameter, Group, or Table Name Type - Data type Values - Value range, and default value, if any Access = access type, R = Read Only (show), RW = Read-Write (can be set), W = Write Only CLI Parameter - Parameter name as used in the Access Point Access Point network objects are associated with Groups. The network objects are listed below and associated parameters are described in the following Parameter Tables:
System Parameters - Access Point system information Inventory Management Information - Hardware, firmware, and software version information
Network Parameters - IP and Network Settings IP Configuration Parameters - Configure the Access Points IP settings DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution - Configure the Access Point as a DNS client DHCP Server Parameters - Enable or disable dynamic host configuration Link Integrity Parameters - Monitor link status Interface Parameters - Configure Wireless and Ethernet settings Wireless Interface Parameters
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Parameters (AP-600b Only) - Configure the WDS partnerships Ethernet Interface Parameters - Set the speed and duplex of the Ethernet port
Management Parameters - Control access to the AP-600s management interfaces Ethernet Protocol Filtering Parameters - Control network traffic based on protocol type Static MAC Address Filter Table - Enable and disable specific addresses Proxy ARP Parameters - Enable or disable proxy ARP for wireless clients IP ARP Filtering Parameters - Control which ARP messages are sent to wireless clients based on IP settings Broadcast Filtering Table - Control the type of broadcast packets forwarded to the wireless network TCP/UDP Port Filtering - Filter IP packets based on TCP/UDP port SNMP Parameters - Set read and read/write passwords HTTP (web browser) Parameters - Set up the graphical web browser interface Telnet Parameters - Telnet Port setup Serial Port Parameters - Serial Port setup TFTP Server Parameters - Set up for file transfers; specify IP Address, file name, and file type IP Access Table Parameters - Configure range of IP addresses that can access the AP-600 Filtering Parameters Alarms Parameters Bridge Parameters Security Parameters - Access Point security settings Wireless Interface Security Parameters - Configure WEP encryption settings MAC Access Control Parameter - Control wireless access based on MAC address Spanning Tree Parameters - Used to help prevent network loops Storm Threshold Parameters - Set threshold for number of broadcast packets Intra BSS Subscriber Blocking - Enable or disable peer to peer traffic on the same AP Packet Forwarding Parameters - Redirect traffic from wireless clients to a specified MAC address SNMP Table Host Table Parameters - Enter the list of IP addresses that will receive alarms from the AP-600 Syslog Parameters - Configure the AP-600 to send Syslog information to network servers
RADIUS Parameters Primary and Backup RADIUS Server Table Parameters - RADIUS Authentication and Accounting information
Other Parameters IAPP Parameters - Enable or disable the Inter-Access Point Protocol SpectraLink VoIP Parameters (AP-600b Only) - Enable or disable SpectraLink Voice over IP feature 112 Command Line Interface (CLI) System Parameters Name System Name Location Contact Name Contact E-mail Contact Phone FLASH Backup Interval Flash Update System OID Descriptor Type Group DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer DisplayString DisplayString Up Time Integer Emergency Restore to defaults Values N/A User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined max 254 characters 0 - 65535 seconds 0 1 N/A System Name, flash version, S/N, bootloader version dd:hh:mm:ss dd days hh hours mm minutes ss seconds Resets all parameters to default factory values Access CLI Parameter R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW R R R RW system sysname sysloc sysctname sysctemail sysctphone sysflashbckint sysflashupdate sysoid sysdescr sysuptime sysresettodefaults Note: You must enter the following command twice to reset to defaults:
set sysresettodefaults 1 Inventory Management Information Name System Inventory Management Component Table Component Interface Table Type Subgroup Subgroup Subgroup Values N/A N/A N/A Access CLI Parameter R R R sysinvmgmt sysinvmgmtcmptbl sysinvmgmtcmpiftbl 127(127(127(127(
The inventory management commands display advanced information about the AP-600s installed components. You may be asked to report this information to a technical representative if you contact customer support. Network Parameters IP Configuration Parameters Name Network IP Configuration IP Address IP Mask Default Router IP Address Default TTL Address Type 127(127(127(127(
Type Group Group IpAddress IpAddress IpAddress Integer Integer Values N/A N/A User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined (seconds) 64 (default) static dynamic (default) Access CLI Parameter R R RW RW RW RW network ip (Note: The network and ip parameters display the same information) ipaddr ipmask ipgw ipttl RW ipaddrtype The IP Address Assignment Type (ipaddrtype) must be set to static before the IP Address (ipaddr), IP Mask
(ipmask) or Default Gateway IP Address (ipgw) values can be entered. 113 Command Line Interface (CLI) DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution Name DNS Client DNS Client status Primary DNS Server IP Address Secondary DNS Server IP Address Default Domain Name Type Group Integer IpAddress Values N/A enable disable (default) User Defined Access CLI Parameter R RW dns dnsstatus RW dnspridnsipaddr IpAddress User Defined RW dnssecdnsipaddr Integer32 User Defined (up to 254 characters) RW dnsdomainname DHCP Server Parameters Name DHCP Server DHCP Server Status Type Group Integer Gateway IP Address IpAddress Primary DNS IP Address IpAddress Secondary DNS IP IpAddress Address Number of IP Pool Table Entries Integer32 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A enable (1) (default) disable (2) delete (3) User Defined User Defined User Defined Access CLI Parameter R RW RW RW RW dhcp dhcpstatus dhcpgw dhcppridnsipaddr dhcpsecdnsipaddr N/A R dhcpippooltblent The DHCP Server (dhcpstatus) can only be enabled after a DHCP IP Pool table entry has been created. DHCP Server table for IP pools Name DHCP Server IP Address Pool Table Table Index Start IP Address End IP Address Width Default Lease Time
(optional) Maximum Lease Time
(optional) Comment (optional) Status (optional) Type Table Integer IpAddress IpAddress Integer Integer32 Integer32 DisplayString Integer Values N/A Access CLI Parameter R dhcpippooltbl User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined
> 0 86400 sec (default)
> 0 86400 sec (default) User Defined enable (1) disable (2) delete (3) N/A RW RW RW RW index startipaddr endipaddr width defleasetm RW maxleasetm RW RW cmt status 127(127(127(127(
Set either End IP Address or Width (but not both) when creating an IP address pool. 114 Command Line Interface (CLI) Link Integrity Parameters Name Link Integrity Link Integrity Status Link Integrity Poll Interval Link Integrity Poll Retransmissions Type Group Integer Integer Integer Link Integrity IP Target Table Values N/A enable disable (default) 500 - 15000 ms
(in increments of 500ms) 500 ms (default) 0 - 255 5 (default) Access CLI Parameter R RW linkint linkintstatus RW linkintpollint RW linkintpollretx Type Table Values N/A Access CLI Parameter R linkinttbl 1-5 User Defined User Defined (up to 254 characters) enable disable (default) delete N/A RW RW index ipaddr cmt RW status Name Link Integrity IP Target Table Table Index Target IP Address Comment (optional) Integer IpAddress DisplayString Status (optional) Integer Interface Parameters Wireless Interface Parameters The wireless interface group parameter is wif. The interface uses table index 3. Common Parameters to AP-600a and AP-600b Name Wireless Interfaces Table Index Network Name Type Group Integer DisplayString Auto Channel Select (ACS) Integer DTIM Period Integer RTS/CTS Medium Reservation Integer MAC Address PhyAddress Supported Frequency Channels Octet String 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A 3 1 31 characters My Wireless Network A
(default) enable (default) disable 1 65535 1 = default 0 2347 Default is 2347 (off) 12 hex digits Depends on Regulatory Domain Access CLI Parameter R R RW wif index netname RW autochannel RW dtimperiod RW medres R R macaddr suppchannels For AP-600a units in Europe, Auto Channel Select is a read-only parameter; it is always enabled. 115 AP-600a Only Parameters Name Operating Frequency Channel Type Integer 2X Turbo Mode
(not available in all countries) Supported Data Rates Transmit Rate Integer Octet String Integer32 Physical Layer Type Integer Regulatory Domain List DisplayString AP-600b Only Parameters Name Distance between APs Type Integer Interference Robustness Integer Operating Frequency Channel Integer Multicast Rate Integer Closed Wireless System Integer Values Varies by regulatory domain and country. See 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a enable disable (default) See Transmit Rate, below Reported in 500 Kb/sec intervals:
0 - Auto Fallback
(default) 12 (6 Mbits/sec) 18 (9 Mbits/sec) 24 (12 Mbits/sec) 36 (18 Mbits/sec) 48 (24 Mbits/sec) 72 (36 Mbits/sec) 96 (48 Mbits/sec) 108 (54 Mbits/sec) For Turbo mode (not available in all countries):
0 - Auto Fallback
(default) 24 (12 Mbits/sec) 38 (18 Mbits/sec) 48 (24 Mbits/sec) 72 (36 Mbits/sec) 96 (48 Mbits/sec) 144 (72 Mbits/sec) 192 (96 Mbits/sec) 216 (108 Mbits/sec) ofdm (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) for 802.11a FCC (5.15-5.35 GHz, 5.725-5.850 GHz) ETSI (5.15-5.25 GHz only) ETSI (5.15-5.35 GHz) MMK (5.15-5.25 GHz) Singapore (5.15-2.25 GHz, 5.725-5.850 GHz) Values large (default) medium small minicell microcell enable (default) disable 1 - 14; available channels vary by regulatory domain/country; see 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b 1 Mbits/sec (1) 2 Mbits/sec (2) (default) 5.5 Mbits/sec (3) 11 Mbits/sec (4) enable disable (default) Command Line Interface (CLI) Access CLI Parameter RW channel RW turbo R suppdatarates RW txrate R R phytype regdomain Access CLI Parameter RW distaps RW interrobust RW channel RW multrate RW closedsys 116 Command Line Interface (CLI) Name Load Balancing Medium Distribution Type Integer Integer MAC Address Supported Data Rates PhyAddress Octet String Transmit Rate Integer32 Supported Frequency Channels Octet String Physical Layer Type Integer Regulatory Domain List DisplayString 127(127(127(127(
Values enable (default) disable enable (default) disable 12 hex digits Reported in 500 Kb/sec intervals:
2 (1 Mbits/sec) 4 (2 Mbits/sec) (default) 11 (5.5 Mbits/sec) 22 (11 Mbits/sec) Reported in 500 Kb/sec intervals:
0 (auto fallback - default) 2 (1 Mbits/sec) 4 (2 Mbits/sec) 11 (5.5 Mbits/sec) 22 (11 Mbits/sec) Depends on Regulatory Domain dsss (direct sequence spread spectrum) for 802.11b U.S./Canada -- FCC Europe -- ETSI Japan -- MKK Access CLI Parameter RW ldbalance RW meddendistrib R R macaddr suppdatarates RW txrate R R R suppchannels phytype regdomain There is an inter-dependent relationship between the Distance between APs and the Multicast Rate. In general, larger systems operate a lower average transmit rates. Distance between APs Multicast Rate Large Medium Small Minicell Microcell 1 and 2 Mbits/sec 1, 2, and 5.5 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec 1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbits/sec Wireless Distribution System (WDS) Parameters (AP-600b Only) 127(127(127(127(
At this time, WDS is not available for the AP-600a. Name WDS Table Port Index Status Partner MAC Address Type Table Integer Integer PhysAddress Values N/A 3.1 - 3.6 (Wireless) enable, disable User Defined Access CLI Parameter R R RW RW wdstbl portindex status partnermacaddr Ethernet Interface Parameters Name Ethernet Interface Speed Type Group Integer MAC Address PhyAddress Values N/A 10halfduplex 10fullduplex 10autoduplex 100halfduplex 100fullduplex autohalfduplex autoautoduplex (default) N/A Access CLI Parameter R RW ethernet etherspeed R ethermacaddr 117 Command Line Interface (CLI) Management Parameters SNMP Parameters Name SNMP SNMP Management Interface Bitmask Type Group Interface Bitmask Read Password DisplayString Read/Write Password DisplayString HTTP (web browser) Parameters Name HTTP HTTP Management Interface Bitmask Type Group Interface Bitmask HTTP Password DisplayString HTTP Port Integer Help Link DisplayString 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A 0 or 2 - no interfaces
(disable) 1 or 3 - Ethernet 4 or 6 - Wireless 5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7) User Defined public (default) max 63 characters User Defined public (default) max 63 characters Values N/A 0 or 2 - no interfaces
(disable) 1 or 3 - Ethernet 4 or 6 - Wireless 5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7) User Defined max 64 characters User Defined Default = 80 User Defined Access CLI Parameter R RW snmp snmpifbitmask W W snmprpasswd snmprwpasswd Access CLI Parameter R RW http httpifbitmask W httppasswd RW httpport RW httphelplink The default path for the Help files is C:\Program Files\ORiNOCO\AP600\Help\English\index.htm. The ORiNOCO AP-600 Help information is available in English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese. The Help files are copied to your computer in all six languages. To update the Help link to use a different language, enter the appropriate path in the Help Link box. For example, to change to the French Help file, use the following path: C:\Program Files\ORiNOCO\AP600\Help\French\index.htm. Telnet Parameters Name Telnet Telnet Management Interface Bitmask Type Group Interface Bitmask Telnet Port Telnet Login Inactivity Time-out Telnet Session Idle Time-out Integer Integer Integer Values N/A 0 or 2 - no interfaces
(disable) 1 or 3 - Ethernet 4 or 6 - Wireless 5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7) User Defined 23 (default) 1 60 seconds 30 sec (default) 1 - 900 seconds 900 sec (default) Access CLI Parameter R RW telnet telifbitmask RW telport RW tellogintout RW telsessiontout 118 Command Line Interface (CLI) Serial Port Parameters Name Serial Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Type Group Integer Integer Integer Integer Value Values N/A 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600 8 none 1 none (default) xon/xoff Access CLI Parameter R RW R R R RW serial serbaudrate serdatabits serparity serstopbits serflowctrl TFTP Server Parameters These parameters relate to upload and download commands. When a user executes an upload and/or download Command, the specified arguments are stored in TFTP parameters for future use. If nothing is specified in the command line when issuing subsequent upload and/or download commands, the stored arguments are used. Type Group Name TFTP TFTP Server IP Address IpAddress TFTP File Name TFTP File Type DisplayString Integer Values N/A User Defined User Defined img config bootloader Access CLI Parameter R RW RW RW tftp tftpipaddr tftpfilename tftpfiletype IP Access Table Parameters When creating table entries, you may either specify the argument name followed by argument value or simply entering the argument value. When only the argument value is specified, then enter the values in the order depicted by the following table. CLI applies default values to the omitted arguments. Due to the nature of the information, the only argument that can be omitted is the comment argument. Name IP Access Table Table Index IP Address IP Mask Comment (optional) Status (optional) Type Table Integer IpAddress IpAddress DisplayString Integer Values N/A User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined enable (default) disable delete Access CLI Parameter R N/A RW RW RW RW mgmtipaccesstbl index ipaddr ipmask cmt status Filtering Parameters Ethernet Protocol Filtering Parameters Name Ethernet Filtering Filtering Interface Bitmask Type Group Interface Bitmask Operation Type Values N/A 0 or 2 - no interfaces
(disable) 1 or 3 - Ethernet 4 or 6 - Wireless 5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7) passthru block Access CLI Parameter R RW etherflt etherfltifbitmask RW etherfltoptype 119 Command Line Interface (CLI) Ethernet Filtering Table Identify the different filters by using the table index. Name Type Ethernet Filtering Table Table Table Index Protocol Number Protocol Name (optional) DisplayString DisplayString Filter Comment Status (optional) Integer N/A Octet String Values N/A N/A N/A 2- 31 characters enable (1) disable (2) delete (3) 127(127(127(127(
Access CLI Parameter R R RW RW RW RW etherflttbl index protonumber protoname cmt status The filter Operation Type (passthru or block) applies only to the protocol filters that are enabled in this table. Static MAC Address Filter Table Name Static MAC Address Filter Table Table Index Static MAC Address on Wired Network Static MAC Address Mask on Wired Network Static MAC Address on Wireless Network Static MAC Address Mask on Wireless Network Comment (optional) Status (optional) Type Table Values N/A Access CLI Parameter R staticmactbl N/A PhysAddress N/A User Defined R RW index wiredmacaddr PhysAddress User Defined RW wiredmask PhysAddress User Defined RW wirelessmacaddr PhysAddress User Defined RW wirelessmask DisplayString Integer max 255 characters enable (default) disable delete RW RW cmt status Proxy ARP Parameters Name Proxy ARP Status Type Group Integer Values N/A enable disable (default) Access CLI Parameter R RW parp parpstatus IP ARP Filtering Parameters Name IP ARP Filtering Status IP Address Subnet Mask Type Group Integer IpAddress IpAddress Values N/A enable disable (default) User Defined User Defined Access CLI Parameter R RW RW RW iparp iparpfltstatus iparpfltipaddr iparpfltsubmask 120 Command Line Interface (CLI) Broadcast Filtering Table Name Broadcast Filtering Table Index Type Table Integer Values N/A 1-5 Protocol Name Direction DisplayString Integer Status Integer N/A ethertowireless wirelesstoether both (default) enable disable (default) Access CLI Parameter broadcastflttbl R N/A index R RW protoname direction RW status TCP/UDP Port Filtering The following parameters are used to enable/disable the Port filter feature. Name Port Filtering Port Filter Status Type Group Integer Values N/A enable (default) disable Access CLI R RW portflt portfltstatus TCP/UDP Port Filtering Table The following parameters are used to configure TCP/UDP Port filters. Name Port Filtering Table Table Index Type Table N/A Port Type Octet String Port Number Octet String Protocol Name DisplayString Interface Bitmask Integer32 Status (optional) Integer Access CLI R R portflttbl index RW porttype RW portnum RW protoname RW ifbitmask RW status Values N/A User Defined
(there are also 4 pre-defined indices, see Port Number below for more information) TCP UDP TCP/UDP User Defined
(there are also 4 pre-defined protocols:
Index 1: NetBios Name Service 137, Index 2:
NetBios Datagram Service 138, Index 3:
NetBios Session Service 139, Index 4:
SNMP Service 161) User Defined
(there are also 4 pre-defined protocols, see Port Number above) 0 or 2 - no interfaces
(disable) 1 or 3 - Ethernet 4 or 6 - Wireless 5 or 7 - all interfaces
(default is 7) enable (default for new entries) disable (default for pre-defined entries) delete 121 Command Line Interface (CLI) Alarms Parameters SNMP Table Host Table Parameters When creating table entries, you may either specifying the argument name followed by argument value. CLI applies default values to the omitted arguments. Due to the nature of the information, the only argument that can be omitted is the comment argument. Name Type SNMP Trap Host Table Table Table Index IP Address Password Integer IpAddress DisplayString Comment (optional) DisplayString Status (optional) Integer Values N/A User Defined User Defined User Defined (up to 64 characters) User Defined (up to 254 characters) enable (default) disable delete Access CLI Parameter snmptraphosttbl index ipaddr passwd R N/A RW W RW cmt RW status Syslog Parameters The following parameters configure the Syslog settings. Name Syslog Syslog Status Syslog Port Syslog Lowest Priority Logged Type Group Integer Octet String Integer Heartbeat Status Integer Heartbeat Interval (seconds) Integer 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A enable disable (default) 514 1 7 1 = LOG_ALERT 2 = LOG_CRIT 3 = LOG_ERR 4 = LOG_WARNING 5 = LOG_NOTICE 6 = LOG_INFO (default) 7 = LOG_DEBUG enable (1) disable (2) (default) 1 604800 seconds;
900 sec. (default) Access R RW CLI syslog syslogstatus R RW syslogport syslogpritolog RW RW heartbeatstatus heartbeatinterval The Heartbeat parameters are advanced settings not available via the HTTP interface. When Heartbeat is enabled, the AP-600 periodically sends a message to the Syslog server to indicate that it is active. The frequency with which the heartbeat message is sent depends upon the setting of the Heartbeat Interval. Syslog Host Table The table described below configures the Syslog hosts that will receive message from the AP-600. You can configure up to ten Syslog hosts. Name Syslog Host Table Table Index IP Address Comment (optional) Status (optional) Type Table Integer IpAddress DisplayString Integer Values N/A 1 10 User Defined User Defined enable disable delete Access CLI Parameter R N/A RW RW RW sysloghosttbl index ipaddr cmt status 122 Command Line Interface (CLI) Bridge Parameters Spanning Tree Parameters Name Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Status Bridge Priority Type Group Integer Integer Maximum Age Integer Hello Time Integer Forward Delay Integer Values N/A enable disable (default) 0 65535 32768 (default) 600 4000
(in 0.01 sec intervals;
i.e., 6 to 40 seconds) 2000 (default) 100 1000
(in 0.01 sec intervals;
i.e., 1 to 10 seconds) 200 (default) 400 3000
(in 0.01 sec intervals;
i.e., 4 to 30 seconds) 1500 (default) Access CLI Parameter R RW stp stpstatus RW stppriority RW stpmaxage RW stphellotime RW stpfwddelay Spanning Tree Priority and Path Cost Table Name Spanning Tree Table Table Index (Port) Priority Path Cost State Type Table N/A Integer Integer Integer Status Integer Storm Threshold Parameters Name Storm Threshold Broadcast Threshold Type Group Integer Multicast Threshold Integer Storm Threshold Table Values N/A 1 15 0 255 128 (default) 1 65535 100 (default) disable blocking listening learning forwarding broken enable disable Access CLI Parameter R R RW stpbl index priority RW pathcost R state RW status Values N/A 0 255 packets/sec
(default is 0) 0 255 packets/sec
(default is 0) Access CLI Parameter N/A RW stmthres stmbrdthres RW stmmultithres Name Storm Threshold Table Table Index Type Table Integer Broadcast Threshold Integer Multicast Threshold Integer Values N/A 1 = Ethernet 3 = Wireless 0 255 packets/sec
(default is 0) 0 255 packets/sec
(default is 0) Access CLI Parameter R R stmthrestbl index RW bcast RW mcast 123 Command Line Interface (CLI) Intra BSS Subscriber Blocking The following parameters control the Intra BSS traffic feature, which prevent wireless clients that are associated with the same AP-600 from communicating with each other:
Name Intra BSS Traffic Intra BSS Traffic Operation Type Group Integer Values N/A passthru (default) block Access CLI R RW intrabss intrabssoptype Packet Forwarding Parameters The following parameters control the Packet Forwarding feature, which redirects wireless traffic to a specific MAC address:
Name Packet Forwarding MAC Address Packet Forwarding MAC Address Packet Forwarding Status Packet Forwarding Interface Port Type Group Values N/A Access CLI R pktfwd MacAddress User Defined RW pktfwdmacaddr RW pktfwdstatus RW pktfwdif Integer Integer enable disable (default) 0 (any) (default) 1 (Ethernet) 3 (WDS 1) 4 (WDS 2) 5 (WDS 3) 6 (WDS 4) 7 (WDS 5) 8 (WDS 6) 127(127(127(127(
The Wireless Distribution System (WDS) feature is not available for the AP-600a at this time. Security Parameters Name Security Configuration Mode Type Group Integer Re-keying Interval Integer Values N/A none (default) 802.1x mixed 60 65535 seconds default is 900 sec Access CLI Parameter R RW security secconfig RW secrekeyint Wireless Interface Security Parameters The following table details the WEP encryption parameters for the AP-600 (both the AP-600a and the AP-600b). Name Wireless Interfaces Security Encryption Status Type Group Integer Index Encryption Key 1 Encryption Key 2 Encryption Key 3 Encryption Key 4 Deny non-encrypted Data Data Transmission Encryption Key Integer DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString DisplayString Integer Integer Values Access CLI Parameter R wifsec RW encryptstatus R W W W W RW index encryptkey1 encryptkey2 encryptkey3 encryptkey4 encryptdeny RW encryptkeytx enable disable (default) 3 User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined enable (default) disable 1 (default) 2 3 4 124 Command Line Interface (CLI) 127(127(127(127(
See WEP Encryption for information on the supported WEP Key lengths. Security Encryption Key Length Table The following table details how to set the Encryption Key Length for the wireless interfaces. Name Security Encryption Key Length Table Index Type Table Integer Encryption Key Length Integer 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A 3 64 bit 128 bit 152 bit Access CLI Parameter secenckeylentbl R N/A index RW enckeylen The available Encryption Key Lengths vary based on model. The AP-600a supports 64, 128, or 152 bits. The AP-600b supports 64 bits or 128 bits. MAC Access Control Parameter Name MAC Address Control Status Operation Type Type Group Integer Integer MAC Access Control Table Values N/A enable disable (default) passthru (default) block Access CLI Parameter R RW macacl macaclstatus RW macacloptype Name MAC Address Control Table Table Index MAC Address Comment (optional) N/A PhysAddress DisplayString Status (optional) Integer RADIUS Parameters Type Table Values N/A Access CLI Parameter R macacltbl N/A User Defined User Defined max 254 characters enable (default) disable R RW RW index macaddr cmt RW status Primary and Backup RADIUS Server Table Parameters ORiNOCO devices that use RADIUS authentication and/or accounting support both primary and backup RADIUS servers. The configuration parameters and statistics are the same for both primary and backup servers. The CLI differentiates the primary and backup RADIUS parameters by using the table index. General RADIUS Parameters Name RADIUS MAC Access Control Status Authorization Lifetime Type Group Integer Integer32 MAC Address Format Integer Values N/A enable disable (disable) 60 43200 seconds 900 sec. (default) dashdelimited (default) colondelimited singledashdelimited no delimiter Access CLI Parameter R R radius radmacacctrl RW radauthlifetm RW radmacaddrformat 125 Command Line Interface (CLI) RADIUS Accounting Status Accounting Inactivity Timer Integer Integer32 enable disable (disable) 0 2147483647 minutes; default is 5 min. RW radaccstatus RW radaccinactivetmr RADIUS Authentication 127(127(127(127(
Use a server name only if you have enabled the DNS Client functionality. See DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution. Name Type RADIUS Authentication Table Primary RADIUS Backup RADIUS RADIUS Server Status Integer Integer Integer Server Addressing Format (see note) Server IP Address or Name Integer IpAddress DisplayString Port (optional) Integer Shared Secret DisplayString Response Time (sec) Integer Maximum Retransmissions
(optional) Integer Values N/A 1 2 enable disable (default) ipaddr (default) name User Defined
(enter an IP address if seraddrfmt is ipaddr or a name if set to name; up to 254 characters if using a name) User Defined 1812 (default) User Defined max 63 characters 1 4 seconds 3 sec (default) 1 10 3 (default) Access CLI Parameter R R R RW radiustbl index index status RW seraddrfmt RW ipaddr RW port W ssecret RW responsetm RW maxretx RADIUS Accounting 127(127(127(127(
Use a server name only if you have enabled the DNS Client functionality. See DNS Client for RADIUS Name Resolution. Name RADIUS Accounting Primary RADIUS Backup RADIUS RADIUS Server Status Server Addressing Format (see note) Server IP Address or Name Type Table Integer Integer Integer Integer IpAddress Display String Port (optional) Integer Shared Secret DisplayString Response Time (sec) Integer Maximum Retransmissions
(optional) Integer Values N/A 1 2 enable disable (default) ipaddr (default) name User Defined
(enter an IP address if seraddrfmt is ipaddr or a name if set to name; up to 254 characters if using a name) User Defined 1813 (default) User Defined max 63 characters 1 4 seconds 3 sec (default) 1 10 3 (default) Access CLI Parameter R R R RW radacctbl index index status RW seraddrfmt RW ipaddr RW port W ssecret RW responsetm RW maxretx 126 Command Line Interface (CLI) Other Parameters IAPP Parameters Name IAPP IAPP Status Periodic Announce Interval (seconds) Type Group Integer Integer Announce Response Time Handover Time-out Integer Integer Max. Handover Retransmissions Send Announce Request on Startup Integer Integer 127(127(127(127(
Values N/A enable (default) disable 80 120 (default) 160 200 2 seconds 410 ms 512 ms (default) 614 ms 717 ms 819 ms 1 - 10 (default 4) enable (default) disable Access CLI Parameter R RW iapp iappstatus RW iappannint R iappannresp RW iapphandtout RW iapphandretx RW iappannreqstart These parameters configure the Inter Access Point Protocol (IAPP) for roaming. Leave these settings at their default value unless a technical representative asks you to change them. SpectraLink VoIP Parameters (AP-600b Only) Name Spectralink VoIP Spectralink VoIP Status Type Group Integer Values N/A enable disable (default) Access CLI Parameter R RW spectralink speclinkstatus 127 ASCII Character Chart B You can configure WEP Encryption Keys in either Hexadecimal or ASCII format. Hexadecimal digits are 0-9 and A-F
(not case sensitive). ASCII characters are 0-9, A-F, a-f (case sensitive), and punctuation marks. Each ASCII character corresponds to two hexadecimal digits. The table below lists the ASCII characters that you can use to configure WEP Encryption Keys. It also lists the Hexadecimal equivalent for each ASCII character. ASCII Character Hex Equivalent ASCII Character Hex Equivalent ASCII Character Hex Equivalent ASCII Character Hex Equivalent
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 9
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 128 Specifications In This Appendix
Hardware Specifications
Radio Specifications Hardware Specifications Physical Specifications AP-600 Unit (without metal base) Dimensions (H x W x L) = 3.5 x 17 x 21.5 cm (1.5 x 6.75 x 8.5 in.) Weight = 0.68 kg (1.50 lb.) Electrical Specifications Using the Power Adapter Voltage (Input) = 100 to 240 VAC (50-60 Hz) @ 0.4 A Voltage (Output) = 12 VDC Power Consumption = 10 Watts Using Active Ethernet Input Voltage = 42 to 60 VDC Output Current = 200mA at 48V Power Consumption = 10 Watts Environmental Specifications AP-600 Unit Operating Temperature = 0 to +55C ambient temperature (without plastic cabinet) Operating Humidity = 95% maximum (non condensing) Storage Temperature = -20 to +75C ambient temperature Storage Humidity = 95% maximum (non condensing) Ethernet Interface 10/100 Base-TX, RJ-45 female socket Serial Port Interface Standard RS-232C interface with DB-9, female connector C 129 Specifications Active Ethernet Interface Category 5, foiled, twisted pair cables must be used to ensure compliance with FCC Part 15, subpart B, Class B requirements Standard 802.3af pin assignments HTTP Interface Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (preferred), or Netscape 4.x or later. Radio Specifications For AP-600a: 802.11a radio certification is available in the U.S. (FCC), Canada (DOC), Japan (MKK), Europe (ETSI), Singapore, and Australia. For AP-600b: 802.11b radio certification is available in the U.S. (FCC), Canada (DOC), Japan (MKK), Europe (ETSI), Australia, and South Africa. 127(127(127(127(
Refer to the Regulatory Flyer included with the AP-600 for the latest regulatory information. 802.11a Channel Frequencies for the AP-600a The available 802.11a Channels varies by regulatory domain and/or country. FCC (U.S., Canada, Australia) The AP-600a can operate on the following Channels in the FCC regulatory domain:
Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.180 5.200 5.210 5.220 5.240 5.250 5.260 5.280 5.290 Channel ID 60 64 149 152 (see note) 153 157 160 (see note) 161 165 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.300 5.320 5.745 5.760 5.765 5.785 5.800 5.805 5.825 Channel ID 36 40 42 (see note) 44 48 50 (see note) 52 56 58 (see note) 127(127(127(127(
Channels 42, 50, 58, 152, and 160 are the available Channels when 2X Turbo mode is enabled. These Channels are unavailable when 2X Turbo mode is disabled. ETSI (Europe) Some European countries restrict 802.11a operation to the 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency band. Other European countries restrict 802.11a operation to the 5.15-5.35 GHz frequency band. The AP-600a can operate on the following Channels in the European countries that allow operation in the 5.15-5.25 GHz band:
Channel ID 36 40 44 48 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.180 5.200 5.220 5.240 130 Specifications The AP-600a can operate on the following Channels in the European countries that allow operation in the 5.15-5.25 GHz band:
Channel ID 36 40 44 48 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.180 5.200 5.220 5.240 Channel ID 52 56 60 64 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.260 5.280 5.300 5.320 Japan (MKK) The AP-600a can operate on the following Channels in Japan:
Channel ID 34 38 42 46 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.170 5.190 5.210 5.230 Singapore The AP-600a can operate on the following Channels in Singapore:
Channel ID 36 40 42 (see note) 44 48 149 127(127(127(127(
Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.180 5.200 5.210 5.220 5.240 5.745 Channel ID 152 (see note) 153 157 160 (see note) 161 165 Center Frequency
(GHz) 5.760 5.765 5.785 5.800 5.805 5.825 Channels 42, 152, and 160 are the available Channels when 2X Turbo mode is enabled. These Channels are unavailable when 2X Turbo mode is disabled. 802.11b Channel Frequencies for the AP-600b The following table shows the 802.11b channel allocations that vary from country to country. Channel ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 FCC/World
(GHz) 2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462
ETSI
(GHz) 2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472 France
(GHz)
2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472 Japan
(GHz) 2.412 2.417 2.422 2.427 2.432 2.437 2.442 2.447 2.452 2.457 2.462 2.467 2.472 2.484 131 Specifications Wireless Communication Range The range of the wireless signal is related to the composition of objects in the radio wave path and the transmit rate of the wireless communication. Communications at a lower transmit range may travel longer distances. The range values listed in the Communications Range Chart are typical distances as calculated by Proxims development team for FCC-certified products. These values provide a rule of thumb and may vary according to the actual radio conditions at the location where the product is used. The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials. Range is also impacted due to obstacles in the signal path of the radio that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal. In Open Office environments, antennas can see each other (no physical obstructions between them). In Semi-open Office environments, workspace is divided by shoulder-height, hollow wall elements; antennas are at desktop level. In a Closed Office environment, solid walls and other obstructions may affect signal strength. The following tables show typical range values for various environments for FCC-certified products (range may differ for products certified in other regulatory domains). AP-600a Range Open Office Semi-Open Office Closed Office 54 Mbits/s 54 Mbits/s 36 Mbits/s 24 Mbits/s 18 Mbits/s 12 Mbits/s 9 Mbits/s 6 Mbits/s 44 m
(144 ft.) 29 m
(95 ft.) 21 m
(69 ft.) 67 m
(220 ft.) 42 m
(138 ft.) 28 m
(92 ft.) 102 m
(335 ft.) 60 m
(197 ft.) 37 m
(121 ft.) 155 m
(508 ft.) 85 m
(279 ft.) 49 m
(161 ft.) 212 m
(695 ft.) 111 m
(364 ft.) 61 m
(200 ft.) 261 m
(856 ft.) 132 m
(433 ft.) 71 m
(233 ft.) 290 m
(951 ft.) 145 m
(475 ft.) 76 m
(250 ft.) 321 m
(1053 ft.) 158 m
(518 ft.) 82 m
(269 ft.) Receiver Sensitivity
-69 dBm
-73 dBm
-77 dBm
-81 dBm
-84 dBm
-86 dBm
-87 dBm
-88 dBm Table C-1 AP-600a: 802.11a Wireless communication ranges 127(127(127(127(
The typical range values for 2X Turbo mode are similar to the values listed above. For example, the operating range at 108 Mbits/sec in 2X Turbo mode is similar to the operating range at 54 Mbits/sec in 802.11a mode. AP-600b Range Open Office Semi-Open Office Closed Office Receiver Sensitivity Table C-2 11 Mbits/s 5.5 Mbits/s 2 Mbits/s 253 m
(830 ft.) 129 m
(423 ft.) 69 m
(226 ft.)
-82 dBm 347 m
(1138 ft.) 168 m
(551 ft.) 86 m
(282 ft.)
-85 dBm 475 m
(1558 ft.) 220 m
(722 ft.) 107 m
(351 ft.)
-88 dBm 1 Mbits/s 650 m
(2132 ft.) 286 m
(938 ft.) 132 m
(433 ft.)
-91 dBm AP-600b: 802.11b Wireless communication ranges 132 Technical Support D If you are having a problem using an AP-600 and cannot resolve it with the information in Troubleshooting, gather the following information and contact ORiNOCO Technical Support:
Product names and quantity Part numbers (P/N) Serial numbers (S/N) List of ORiNOCO products installed on your network; include the following:
List of ORiNOCO software versions installed For the AP-600, check the HTTP interfaces Version screen Include the source of the software version (e.g., pre-loaded on unit, installed from CD, downloaded from Proxim Web site, etc.) Information about your network Network operating system (e.g., Microsoft Networking); include version information Protocols used by network (e.g., TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk) Ethernet frame type (e.g., 802.3, Ethernet II), if known IP addressing scheme (include address range and whether static or DHCP) Network speed and duplex (10 or 100 Mbits/sec; full or half duplex) Type of Ethernet device that the Access Points are connected to (e.g., Active Ethernet power injector, hub, switch, etc.) Type of Security enabled on the wireless network (None, WEP Encryption, 802.1x, Mixed) A description of the problem you are experiencing What were you doing when the error occurred?
What error message did you see?
Can you reproduce the problem?
For each ORiNOCO product, describe the behavior of the devices LEDs when the problem occurs You can reach ORiNOCO Technical Support by phone or e-mail, as described below. 127(127(127(127(
The latest software and documentation is available for download at http://www.proxim.com/support/. For the U.S. and Canada:
Phone:
E-mail:
1-866-ORiNOCO (1-866-674-6626) USAsupport@orinocowireless.com For the Caribbean and Latin America:
Phone:
1-866-ORiNOCO (1-866-674-6626) 1-661-367-2230 CALAsupport@orinocowireless.com E-mail:
133 Technical Support For Asia Pacific:
Phone:
E-mail:
+1 661-367-2230 APACsupport@orinocowireless.com For Europe, the Middle East, and Africa (EMEA):
Your local supplier in the EMEA region is trained to give you the support you require. Local suppliers have direct access to the ORiNOCO Technical Support Center and will help you in every way they can. Phone:
E-mail:
+1 661-367-2230 EMEAsupport@orinocowireless.com 134 USA/Canada section from the products regulatory flyer:
INFORMATION TO THE USER This document provides regulatory information for the following products:
Wireless Base Station products such as the AP- 600 Base Station products are wireless network products based on IEEE 802.11 standards for wireless LANs as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Products designed according the IEEE 802.11a standard use Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology. Products designed according the IEEE 802.11b standard use Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) radio technology. These products are designed to be interoperable with any other wireless product that complies with the corresponding standard. Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification is defined by the WECA Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
a. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. b. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. c. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Additional Installation Requirements for Base Station products When installing Base Stations the placement of the device must also satisfy the following installation requirements:
a. Connect the unit to a grounding type AC wall outlet (100-240 V AC) using only the standard power cord/adapter provided with the product. b. Placement must allow the user to easily disconnect the power cord/adapter of the device from the AC wall-outlet. c. Do not cover the device, or block the airflow to the device with any other objects. Keep the device away from excessive heat and humidity and keep the device free from vibration and dust. Installation must at all times conform to local regulations. d. e. Always disconnect the cables before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated cable, jack or internal component. f. Connections to Base Station products can be made with either Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) or Shielded Twisted Pair cabling (STP) cabling. When using the device in combination with Power over Ethernet, only use Shielded Twisted Pair cabling (STP). SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Wireless LAN and your Health Wireless LAN products, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of emitted energy however is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones, for example. Because Wireless LAN products operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, we believe that our Wireless LAN products are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. Regulatory Information This device must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific radio approvals or restrictions, please consult section Radio Approvals of this flyer. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. For example, these situations may include:
Using the wireless equipment on board of airplanes, or In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless equipment in a specific organization or environment
(e.g., airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use this device prior to turning on the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by manufacturer. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. INFORMATIONS POUR LUTILISATEUR Ce document fournit des informations sur les rglementations concernant les produits suivants :
Les produits sans fil de la Base Station tels que la AP- 600. Les produits client et de la Base Station sont des produits pour rseaux sans fil conus selon les normes IEEE 802.11 dfinies et approuves par lInstitute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Les produits conus selon les normes IEEE 802.11b qui utilisent la technologie radio Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), cest--dire spectre tendu squence directe. Les produits conus selon les normes IEEE 802.11a utilisent la technologie radio Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) , cest--dire division multiplex de frquence orthogonale. Ces produits sont conus pour roperer avec n'importe quel autre produit sans fil qui est conforme la norme correspondante. Certification Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) dfinie par la WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES CONCERNANT LA SECURITE Quand vous utilisez ce dispositif, suivez toujours les prcautions de scurit lmentaires afin de rduire tout risque dincendie, de secousse lectrique et daccident, y compris les prcautions suivantes :
a. Nutilisez pas ce produit proximit de leau, par exemple prs dune baignoire, dun lavabo, dun vier ou dune cuve linge, dans un sous-sol humide ou prs dune piscine. b. Evitez dutiliser ce produit en cas dorage magntique. Les clairs sont susceptibles de provoquer des secousses lectriques. c. Nutilisez pas ce produit pour signaler une fuite de gaz proximit de la fuite elle-mme. Autres conditions dinstallation des produits de la Base Station Quand vous installez une Base Station (station de base), lemplacement du dispositif doit galement satisfaire les conditions dinstallation suivantes :
a. Branchez lunit sur une prise murale CA de type la terre (100-240 V CA) laide du cordon ou de ladaptateur b. dalimentation standard fourni avec lunit. Lemplacement choisi doit permettre de dbrancher aisment le cordon ou ladaptateur dalimentation du dispositif de la prise murale CA. c. Ne couvrez pas le dispositif et ne bloquez pas le passage de lair vers les autres objets. Tenez le dispositif loign de toute source de chaleur et dhumidit et labri des vibrations et de la poussire. Linstallation doit toujours tre conforme aux rglementations locales. d. e. Dbranchez toujours les cbles avant douvrir lquipement ou de toucher un cble non isol, une prise ou un composant interne. Les connexions une Base Station (station de base) peuvent tre faites laide de cblages bifilaires torsads non blinds (Unshielded Twisted Pair ou UTP) ou de cblages bifilaires torsads blinds (Shielded Twisted Pair ou STP). Si vous utilisez le dispositif en combinaison avec la solution Power over Ethernet, utilisez uniquement des cblages bifilaires torsads blinds (Shielded Twisted Pair ou STP). f. CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Rseaux sans fil et votre sant Les produits pour un rseau sans fil, comme dautres dispositifs radio, mettent de lnergie lectromagntique de frquence radio. Le niveau dnergie mis par les dispositifs pour rsaeu sans fil est toutefois beaucoup moins lev que lnergie lectro-magntique mise par des dispositifs comme par exemple les tlphones portables. Puisque les produits pour rseau san fil fonctionnent selon les directives contenues dans les normes et recommandations de scurit en matire de frquence radio, nous considront que lutilisation de ces producits est sans danger pour les consommateurs. Ces normes et recommandations sont le reflet du consensus obtenu par la communaut scientifique et rsultent des dlibrations de groupes et de comits de scientifiques qui revoient et interprtent en permanence la masse dcrits sur le sujet. Informations sur les rglementations Ce dispositif doit absolument tre install et utilis conformment aux instructions dcrites dans la documentation utilisateur fournie avec le produit. Pour les certifications radio propres chaque pays, veuillez consulter la section Certifications radio de ce dpliant. Dans certaines situations ou environnements, lutilisation des dispositifs sans fil peut tre limite par le propritaire du btiment ou par les reprsentants responsables de la socit. Ces situations comprennent par exemple :
lutilisation de lquipement sans fil bord davions ou dans tout autre environnement o le risque dinterfrence avec dautres dispositifs ou services est peru ou identifi comme nuisible. Si vous avez des doutes concernant lutilisation dquipements sans fil dans lenvironnement spcifique dune socit (par ex. les aroports), veuillez demander lautorisation dutiliser le dispositif avant de lallumer. Le fabricant nest pas responsable des interfrences radio ou tlvision causes par une modification non autorise du dispositif compris dans ce kit ou par le remplacement ou le branchement de cbles et quipements de connexion autres que ceux spcifis par le fabricant. La correction des interfrences causes par de telles modifications, substitutions ou branchements non autoriss incombera lutilisateur. Le fabricant et ses revendeurs ou distributeurs autoriss ne sont pas responsables des dgts ou violations des rglementations gouvernementales qui peuvent dcouler de la non-observation de ces directives. United States Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Declaration of Conformity Products marked with the FCC logo comply with Part 15 of FCC Regulations. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Products that contain a radio transmitter are marked with FCC ID number and may also carry the FCC logo. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. This device complies with the FCC limits regarding the exposure to electromagnetic fields, however the following antenna installation and device operating guidelines must be satisfied:
In the case of basestation configurations and/or the use of an approved external antenna, the separation distance between the antenna and the human body (including hands, wrists, feet and ankles) must be at least 20 cm (8 inches). The transmitter shall not be co-located with other transmitters or antennas. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with the limits for a class B digital device and conforms to Industry Canada standard ICES-003. Products that contain a radio transmitter comply with Industry Canada standard RSS 210 and are labelled with IC approval number. Wireless LAN products designed according the IEEE 802.11b standard additionally comply with Industry Canada standard RSS 139. UL or ETL listed products conform to ANSI/UL STD.1950 and are certified to CAN/CSA STD C22.2 NO.950. Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme ICES-003 de Industry Canada. La radio sans fil de ce dispositif est conforme la certification RSS 210 de Industry Canada et est tiquete avec un numro d'approbation IC. Les produits pour rseaux sans fil qui utilisent la norme IEEE 802.11b sont en plus conformes la certification RSS 139 de Industry Canada. Les produits rpertoris UL ou ETL sont conformes ANSI/UL STD.1950 certifis selon la norme CAN/CSA STD C22.2 NO.950. RADIO APPROVALS To determine whether you are allowed to use your device in the countries listed below, please check the transmitter number that is printed on the identification label of your device. Certifications radio Pour dterminer si vous tes autoris utiliser votre dispositif dans les pays indiques ci-dessous, veuillez contrler le numro de lmetteur imprim sur ltiquette didentification de votre dispositif. Country Pays Canada Radio Transmitter metteur Radio Alpha-1: A13QBF Approval Reference Numro du Permis IC: 1856-A13QBF Alpha-1: B11FNF IC: 1856-B11FNF Restrictions Restrictions USA Alpha-1: A13QBF Alpha-1: B11FNF FCC ID: HZB-A13QBF FCC ID: HZB-B11FNF For indoor use only. Pour usage intrieur uniquement. System with outdoor antenna requires licence from Industry Canada. Les systmes dots dune antenne extrieure ncessitent la dlivrance dune licence de la part de Industry Canada. For indoor use only. For Radio Type Number with the format x-yy-zzz:
x =
A identifies a IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN radio product for the 5 GHz frequency band. B identifies a IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN radio product for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. 04, 08, 09, 11, 13 or 14 identifies the number of channels. yy =
Le code pour le type de radio a le format x-yy-zzz:
x =
la norme IEEE 802.11b avec une radio 2,4 GHz. yy =
04, 08, 09, 11, 13 ou 14 indique le nombre de canaux. A indique un produit conforme la norme IEEE 802.11a avec une radio 5 GHz.B indique un produit conforme
1 2 3 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.07 MiB | May 03 2003 / March 03 2003 |
COV_ODC.fm Page 1 Monday, November 6, 2000 1:22 PM Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 36M23'33YXHSSV6SYXIV You can find the latest software & documentation at:
http://www.lucent.com/orinoco 012706/C November 2000 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc. All Rights Reserved COV_ODC.fm Page 2 Monday, November 6, 2000 1:22 PM About this Document The product described in this book is a licensed product of Lucent Technologies Inc. ORiNOCO, WaveLAN, WaveACCESS, WavePOINT and WaveMANAGER are registered trademarks or trademarks of Lucent Technologies Inc.
Microsoft MS-Windows and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. This Document was created by:
Lucent Technologies Nederland B.V. Wireless Communications & Networking Division (WCND) P.O. Box 755 3430 AT Nieuwegein The Netherlands An electronic copy of this document is also available on the enclosed software CD-ROM. Updates of this document can be downloaded from the ORiNOCO Library on the World Wide Web at http://www.lucent.com/orinoco. To view or print the electronic document, in Adobes Portable Document Format (PDF), you will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader, included on the enclosed Software CD-ROM. Alternatively, consult the Adobe website at: http://www.adobe.com. November 6, 2000 It is the policy of Lucent Technologies to improve products as new technology, components, software, and firmware become available. Lucent Technologies, therefore, reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. All features, functions, and operations described herein may not be marketed by Lucent Technologies in all parts of the world. In some instances, drawings are of equipment prototypes. Therefore, before using this document, consult your Lucent Technologies representative or Lucent Technologies office for information that is applicable and current. Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc., All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents 1 Welcome About This Guide I Who Should Use This Guide I Finding Additional Information About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router 2 Preparing for Installation Site Prerequisites Overview of the Indoor Installation I Outdoor Router Hardware I Cable System Overview of the Outdoor Installation I Antenna Placement I Antenna Mast/Wall Bracket I Grounding System I Antenna Cable Routing Before Climbing the Roof... 3 Determine Range & Clearance Introduction Determine the Outdoor Range I Determine the Maximum Range I Determine the Cable Factor I Determine the Clearance Factor 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-4 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-5 2-8 2-8 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-15 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-7 3-8 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide i Examples I Point-to-Point Links I Point-to-MultiPoint Links 4 Installing the Antenna Planning Antenna Installation I Safety Precautions I Installation Overview Mounting the Antenna Connecting the Antenna Cable I Sealing the Cable Connectors A The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components I Selecting the Correct Connector-Type ORiNOCO Cable Assembly ORiNOCO Surge Arrester Low-Loss Antenna Cable B 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description I Contents of the Antenna Box I Mounting the Directional Antenna C 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications I Mounting the Omni-directional Antenna ii ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-13 3-13 3-15 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-7 A-1 A-1 A-2 A-6 A-7 A-9 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 D 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications I Mounting Instructions E 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications I Mounting Instructions F 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications I Kit Contents I Assembling the Antenna I Mounting the Antenna D-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 F-1 F-1 F-2 F-2 F-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide iii G Certified Outdoor Solutions Introduction Selecting the Right Card & Cables Regulatory Information H Support & Warranty Technical Support Warranty and Repair Index List of Figures List of Tables G-1 G-1 G-3 G-7 H-1 H-1 H-2 IX-1 LOF-1 LOT-1 Welcome Contents About This Guide Installing Outdoor Router Hardware Who Should Use This Guide Finding Additional Information I I Configuration and Management I Context-Sensitive Help I Hardware Specifications I Additional files on your Software CD-ROM I Other Sources of Information About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router I ORiNOCO Remote Outdoor Router I ORiNOCO Central Outdoor Router I Upgrading the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router 1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-6 Welcome About This Guide This ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide explains how to install and set-up an outdoor antenna installation based on ORiNOCO PC Cards that will be used in combination with:
I ORiNOCO Outdoor Router products1 I ORiNOCO Client products There is also a chapter about verifying the wireless link quality and correcting problems that might arise during installation or operation. This guide does not explain how to erect antenna masts, or how to install a safety grounding system. These are pre-requisites that must be in place before the directional antenna is installed. Who Should Use This Guide The installation of Outdoor Antenna Links requires technical expertise. At the very least, you should be able to:
I Install and configure the network components, such as the Outdoor Router and the ORiNOCO LAN administrators station. I Understand or have a working knowledge of the installation procedures for network operating systems under Microsoft Windows 95/98 and/or Microsoft Windows NT. I Mount the outdoor antenna and surge arrester. Lucent Technologies recommends that the installation is performed by a qualified antenna installation service. 1 Formerly also referred to as WavePOINT-II PTP, WaveACCESS Link WP-II or WaveCAMPUS. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 1-1 Welcome About This Guide
DANGER:
The ORiNOCO Outdoor Router outdoor antennas are intended for mounting on a roof, or the side of a building. Installation shall not be attempted by someone who is not trained or experienced in this type of work.The antenna has to be installed by a suitably trained professional installation technician or a qualified antenna installation service. The site pre-requisites have to be checked by a person familiar with the national electrical code, and other regulations governing this type of installation. Finding Additional Information Installing Outdoor Router Hardware ORiNOCO outdoor antenna installations are typically connected to Outdoor Router devices. The hardware installation of these devices is described in the Getting Started Guide that is included with each Outdoor Router unit. Configuration and Management The configuration and management of outdoor antenna links is controlled via the OR Manager program; an MS-Windows based application that can be installed on almost any computer running Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT (v4.0). How to install this program is described in the Getting Started Guide that is included with each Outdoor Router unit. How to use the OR Manager program is described in:
I The Context-Sensitive Help as described below. I The "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" provided on the software CD-
ROM that came with the Outdoor Router device (inserted inside the back-
side cover of the Getting Started Guide that came with your product). I The "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" also describes how to monitor the performance of your wireless network, and provides hints and scenarios for troubleshooting performance degradation. To view and/or print these documents, you will need to install the Adobe Acrobat Reader provided on the software CD-ROM. 1-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Welcome About This Guide Context-Sensitive Help Context-sensitive help for the OR Manager program is available by clicking the Help button on the screen or pressing the function key. F1 Hardware Specifications I Outdoor Router hardware specifications are described in the Getting Started Guide that is shipped with each device. I Radio Frequency specifications of the Outdoor Router are described in the
"ORiNOCO PC Card Getting Started". I Hardware specifications for the outdoor antennas, the cabling system and the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester are listed in Appendices of this guide. Additional files on your Software CD-ROM All software CD-ROMs (or diskettes) that came with your ORiNOCO products, include a file called readme.txt. This file contains information about the software version and/or drivers on the diskette. NOTE:
You are advised to print and read the readme.txt file prior to installing your ORiNOCO products, as it may contain additional information that was not available when this document was printed. Other Sources of Information All documentation listed above can be downloaded from the ORiNOCO website at: http://www.lucent.com/orinoco. NOTE:
You are advised to visit the website at regular intervals for the latest available information, documentation and software updates and other ORiNOCO news. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 1-3 Welcome About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router The ORiNOCO Outdoor Router enables you to setup a wireless system that supports:
I ORiNOCO Remote Outdoor Router functionality, or I ORiNOCO Central Outdoor Router functionality. ORiNOCO Remote Outdoor Router With two ORiNOCO Remote Outdoor Routers, its easy to setup a wireless Point-to-Point link as pictured in Figure 1-1 below. Figure 1-1 ORiNOCO Point-to-Point Link The Point-to-Point (PTP) Link functionality enables you to setup a connection between two locations as an alternative to:
I Leased lines in building-to-building connections, or I Wired Ethernet backbones between AP-1000s in hard-to-wire environments. 1-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Welcome About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router ORiNOCO Central Outdoor Router If you wish to connect more than two buildings, you can choose to:
I Setup multiple Point-to-Point links, using multiple pairs of Remote Outdoor Router systems, or I Setup a single Point-to-Multipoint system using a single Central Outdoor Router and multiple Remote Outdoor Routers as pictured in Figure 1-2 below. Figure 1-2 ORiNOCO Point-to-Multipoint Link Looking at Figure 1-2 the system is designed as follows:
I The central building c is equipped with the Central Outdoor Router, connected to either an omni-directional, or wide angle antenna. I The two Remote buildings a and b have both been equipped with Remote Outdoor Routers connected to directional antennas. NOTE:
Subject to local radio regulations and legislation, the outdoor antenna solutions described in this document may not be available in all parts of the world. Consult Appendix G Certified Outdoor Solutions for more information. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 1-5 Welcome About ORiNOCO Outdoor Router Upgrading the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router If you wish to extend the features of previously purchased hardware you can purchase dedicated Software License Kits to upgrade:
I AP-1000 into one of the ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers described on the previous pages. I Extend the features of a previously purchased ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers. For more information about the software license upgrade program, please consult:
I Your authorized ORiNOCO Reseller or local Lucent Technologies Sales office for more information. I The ORiNOCO website at: http://www.lucent.com/orinoco. 1-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Contents Site Prerequisites Overview of the Indoor Installation Outdoor Router Hardware I Outdoor Router I Outdoor Router Client Cable System I Placement of the Surge Arrester I Antenna Cable Route Overview of the Outdoor Installation Tripod Mount Antenna Placement Antenna Mast/Wall Bracket I I Wall (Side) Mount I Antenna Mast Requirements Grounding System I Antenna Alignment I Antenna Polarization Antenna Cable Routing 2 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-8 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-12 2-13 2-14 Before Climbing the Roof... 2-15 Preparing for Installation Site Prerequisites Please review all requirements outlined within the sections listed below before starting the installation procedure:
I Overview of the Indoor Installation (page 2-2) I Overview of the Outdoor Installation (page 2-8) I Before Climbing the Roof... (page 2-15) Prior to climbing on the roof or any other area where you intend to install the outdoor antenna, you are advised to:
I Verify you have arranged all safety measures for outdoor/rooftop installation
(see the Safety Precautions on page 4-1). I Verify you have all equipment and tools required to install the outdoor antennas. I Install and verify proper operation of the equipment. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-1 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation The indoor installation of the link will consist of the following components:
I Outdoor Router Hardware, and I A Cable System. Outdoor Router Hardware There are two types of hardware installations to setup a wireless connection:
I The Outdoor Router, and I The Outdoor Router Client. Outdoor Router To setup a point-to-point wireless connection between two Outdoor Routers, you will need:
I Two ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers with PC Card, and I Two antenna cable systems (see Appendix Appendix A The Antenna Cabling System), and I Two outdoor antennas. Figure 2-1 shows an overview of the hardware setup for this indoor installation. Figure 2-1 Overview Indoor Installation of the Outdoor Router 2-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation On each end of the wireless link you will need the following items as pictured in Figure 2-1 on page 2-2:
a. The ORiNOCO PC Card (see Selecting the Right Card & Cables on page G-3). b. The Outdoor Router device that has been loaded with ORiNOCO Outdoor Router software. c. The Cable Assembly to connect the PC Card to the Surge Arrester. d. A surge arrester to protect your sensitive ORiNOCO equipment from static discharge and transients that may occur to your antenna. e. A low-loss antenna cable to connect the indoor installation to the outdoor antenna. f. A grounding system as described in Grounding System on page 2-12.
! WARNING:
The ORiNOCO Outdoor Router, the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester and the antenna mast must be connected to the same grounding system. Placement of the Outdoor Router Hardware The hardware of your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router device is designed for indoor mounting and operation. The ideal location to install your Outdoor Router unit must satisfy the following requirements:
I The location provides a connection to a grounding type AC wall outlet (100-
240 VAC), using the standard power cord as supplied with the unit. The ground of the AC wall outlet must be connected to the same grounding system as the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester and antenna mast (see Grounding System on page 2-12). I The location must allow for easily disconnecting the Outdoor Router unit from the AC wall outlet. I The location provides a connection to the network backbone that may either be:
I I The Ethernet LAN cable that connects it to a hub, bridge or directly into a patch panel or The wireless connection via a second ORiNOCO PC Card that is inserted into the other PC Card slot of the Outdoor Router device. I The location is as close as possible to the point where the antenna cable will enter the building (see also Placement of the Surge Arrester on page 2-5). ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-3 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation Outdoor Router Client To setup a wireless connection with the Outdoor Router Client, you will need:
I One PC Card, I One Outdoor Router Client License Kit, and I One antenna cabling system. Figure 2-2 shows an overview of the hardware setup for this indoor installation. Figure 2-2 Overview Indoor Installation Outdoor Router Client On each end of the wireless link you will need the following items as pictured in Figure 2-2:
a. The ORiNOCO PC Card (see Selecting the Right Card & Cables on page G-3). b. The Cable Assembly to connect the ORiNOCO PC Card (A) to the Surge Arrester. c. A surge arrester to protect your sensitive ORiNOCO equipment from static discharge and transients that may occur to your antenna. d. A low-loss antenna cable to connect the indoor installation to the outdoor antenna. e. A grounding systems as described in Grounding System on page 2-12.
! WARNING:
The ORiNOCO Outdoor Router, the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester and the antenna mast must be connected to the same grounding system. 2-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation Cable System
CAUTION:
The Outdoor Router products are designed for indoor installation. At all times the location of the Outdoor Router unit must be indoors, to protect the unit from extreme weather conditions, excessive heat and humidity and to keep the unit free from vibration and dust. Prior to mounting the Outdoor Router products you are advised to carefully calculate:
I The distance between the intended location of your Outdoor Router unit and the location of the antenna mast, and I The height of the antenna on the mast. If the low-loss antenna cable is not long enough to cover this distance you can select from the following two options:
I Select another cable length from the Lucent Technologies low-loss cable offering (see Appendix A The Antenna Cabling System), or I Select another location that satisfies the requirements listed on the previous page to mount your Outdoor Router device. As the length of the antenna cable may affect the actual range of your outdoor antenna installation, the second one is the preferred option.
! WARNING:
You are not allowed to change the length of the Lucent Technologies low-loss antenna cable. Shortening the cable will void the Lucent Technologies Warranty, and may conflict with radio certifications and/or approvals. How to install the Outdoor Router hardware is described in the Getting Started Guide that was shipped with the Outdoor Router device. Placement of the Surge Arrester The ORiNOCO Surge Arrester is an indispensable part of your outdoor antenna installation, to protect your sensitive electronic equipment from transients or electro-static discharges at the antenna. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-5 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation For optimal protection the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester must be installed at a location that satisfies the following requirements:
I A location as close to the location where the antenna cable will enter the building (see also Placement of the Outdoor Router Hardware on page 2-3). I The location allows for easily (dis-)connecting the surge arrester from/to the ORiNOCO PC Card in the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router using the Cables Assembly pictured in Figure 2-1 on page 2-2. I The location provides a connection to the same grounding system as the Outdoor Router unit and the outdoor antenna mast as described in Grounding System on page 2-12. Antenna Cable Route The antenna cable must be connected to the Outdoor Router unit via the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester and Cable Assembly as pictured in Figure 2-1 on page 2-2. To plan the route of the antenna cable please consider the following:
I Does the cable route require drilling through a wall or ceiling?
I Do you have a building plan of the desired location showing any other existing cabling routes like electricity, telephone or networking?
I Does the type of building materials require special tools for drilling purposes?
The cable should not be installed into tight positions, as bending or applying excessive force to the connectors may damage the antenna cable. Always allow the cable to bend naturally around corners. The recommended bend radius is 100 mm (4 in.). The antenna cable must be secured along its complete length. No part of the antenna cable should be allowed to hang free. This is particularly important for cable parts that are installed outdoors. 2-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Indoor Installation
CAUTION:
The antenna cable and cable connectors are not designed to withstand excessive force:
a. Do not use the connectors as cable grips to pull cable through raceway or conduit. b. Do not use the cable connector to support the weight of the cable during or after installation. c. Do not use any appliances to tighten the connectors. d. Always seal the connectors using weather-proofing tape. Prior to sealing the outdoor connectors and permanently securing the cable to the wall using cable ties and wall hooks, you may wish to verify if the installation and all components function properly. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-7 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation The outdoor installation of the link (point-to-point or point-to-multipoint) will consist of the following components:
I The Lucent Technologies Antenna I The Lucent Technologies proprietary low-loss antenna cable (available in different cable lengths). I Antenna Mast/Wall Bracket for the antenna. I An adequate Grounding System that meets the requirements described in Grounding System on page 2-12. NOTE:
All outdoor cable connectors must be sealed with the enclosed weather-
proofing stretch tape to permanently waterproof the coax connectors.
DANGER:
For your own safety, the antenna mast and the grounding system should be installed only by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and/or the national electrical codes. Carefully read the instructions as described for the Grounding System on page 2-12 and verify that your installation complies with the appropriate regulations and codes before installing the antenna. Antenna Placement To achieve maximum performance for your wireless outdoor connection, the ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna must have clear line-of-sight. Line-of-sight can be defined as:
I No obstacles in the direct path between the two antennas. I No obstacles within a defined zone around the antenna beam. You need to be aware that the shape of a radio beam is not straight and narrow like a laser beam. The radio beam, also referred to as Fresnel Zone1, is rather bulged in the middle, like for example a rugby ball. The exact shape and width of the Fresnel Zone is determined by the path length and frequency of the radio signal. 1 Pronounced as Fray-Nell 2-8 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation If any significant part of this zone is obstructed, a portion of the radio energy will be lost, resulting in reduced performance. Reduced performance may also occur when obstacles that are close to the antenna beam cause signal reflections or noise that interfere with the radio signal. Figure 2-3 shows some typical examples of obstacles that you must avoid for the Directional Antenna to operate effectively:
a. Neighboring Buildings b. Trees or other obstructions c. Power lines To allow optimal performance you will need to ensure that the type and placement of the antennas leaves sufficient clearance of the Fresnel Zone at the maximum width of the bulge, typically at the mid-point between the antennas. For more information turn to Chapter 3 Determine Range & Clearance. Figure 2-3 Potential Obstacles for a Directional Antenna ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-9 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation To minimize the influence of obstacles, signal interference or reflections please note the following guidelines:
I Mount the antenna as high as possible above the ground to allow maximum clearance:
I I In open areas ground is the actual surface of the earth In dense urban areas ground is to be interpreted as the height of the highest obstacle in the signal path between the two antenna sites. I Avoid trees in the signal path to avoid signal absorption due to dynamic changes in seasons (leaves/ice). I Install the antenna at least 2 m (6 ft) away from all other antennas. Other situations where reflections of the radio signal may cause interference are environments where large reflecting surfaces exist in parallel or partly perpendicular to the antenna beam. Environments with large reflective surfaces include:
I Mirrored-glass buildings I Crowded parking lots I Water or moist earth and moist vegetation I Above ground power/telephone lines Weather conditions such as rain or snow usually will not have much impact on the performance of your ORiNOCO Outdoor System, provided that you sealed all cable connectors using the weather-proofing tape. Seasonal factors that could have an effect on signal propagation may occur in the following situations:
I A marginal communications quality in late fall (with no leaves on trees in the signal path) might fail in the summer. I In winter, an antenna link may fail when the antenna is exposed to ice buildup, or when the antenna elements are covered with snow. NOTE:
Radio paths over water or extremely flat ground may require optimization of antenna height at one end of the path. This is due to reflections adding in-phase or out-of-phase. Adjustment of antenna height by 1 to 3 meters should move the signal from a null to a peak. In these cases consult your supplier to take appropriate steps to maintain or optimize wireless performance. 2-10 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation Antenna Mast/Wall Bracket Basically there are two ways to erect an antenna mast:
I Tripod Mount I Wall (Side) Mount Tripod Mount The tripod mount is used primarily on peaked and flat roofs. The antenna mast must be secured to the roof using 3 or 4 guy wires that are equally spaced around the mast. When the height of the antenna mast is more than 3 meters
(10 ft), you are advised to use at least three guy wires for each 3 meter (10 ft) section of the mast. Wall (Side) Mount A wall (side) mount allows for mounting an antenna (mast) on the side of a building or on the side of an elevator penthouse. This will provide a convenient mounting location when the roof overhang is not excessive and/or the location is high enough to provide a clear line of sight. In most situations mounting an antenna directly to the wall will not allow you to properly align the antenna with the corresponding antenna at the opposite end of your wireless link. As poor alignment will typically result in poor performance, Lucent Technologies advises you to always mount the antennas to a mast. Antenna Mast Requirements To accommodate the ORiNOCO antennas, the antenna mast must satisfy the following requirements:
a. The construction of the mast must be of a sturdy, weatherproof and non-
corrosive material like for example galvanized or stainless steel construction pipe. b. Typical diameter of the mast should be between 35 mm (1.4 in.) and 41 mm
(1.625 in.). Subject to the type of antenna that you intend to install other diameters may be possible as well. c. The height of the antenna mast must be sufficient to allow the antenna to be installed at least 1.5 m (5 ft.) above the peak of roof. If the roof is metal, then the height of the antenna should be a minimum of 3 m (10 ft) above the roof
(see also Chapter 3 Determine Range & Clearance). d. The mast or wall-bracket must be free from any substance that may prevent a good electrical connection with the antenna; for example, paint. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-11 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation Grounding System Direct grounding of the antenna mast, ORiNOCO Outdoor Router bridge and ORiNOCO Surge Arrester is very important. A safety grounding system is necessary to protect your ORiNOCO Outdoor installation from lightning strikes and the build-up of static electricity.
! WARNING:
The antenna mast, ORiNOCO Outdoor Router and ORiNOCO Surge Arrester must be connected to the same ground, using an equipotential bonding conductor. A good electrical connection should be made to one or more ground rods, using at least a 10AWG ground wire and non-corrosive hardware. The grounding system must comply with the National Electrical Code and safety standards that apply in your country. Always check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to whether your ORiNOCO Outdoor installation is properly grounded. Antenna Alignment For optimal performance of your wireless link, make sure that the antennas are properly aligned (facing one another eye-to-eye). To align the antennas:
I Use a pair of binoculars and/or a map of the area and compass to point the antennas to one another. I Use the Wireless Link Test option of the OR Manager as described in the
"ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" to analyze the radio link quality. The Wireless Link Test option will enable you to display the strength of the ORiNOCO radio signal related to the noise that may be appear in the signal path. Looking at the Wireless Link Test screen, you can interactively optimize antenna alignment if required, by making small modifications in the antenna orientation. I Alternatively, consult a professional Antenna Installation Service to optimize the antenna alignment. Omni-directional antennas are characterized by a wide radiation pattern. Therefore alignment of this type of antennas is less critical than for directional antennas. 2-12 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation Figure 2-4 OR Manager Wireless Link Test Antenna Polarization The standard mounting method for Lucent Technologies outdoor antennas is designed for vertical polarization. In some cases you might consider mounting the antenna for horizontal polarization. For example to minimize the influence of cross-talk between antennas when:
I You plan to mount multiple directional antennas to the same mast. I Your wireless link crosses another radio beam from a neighboring installation. Mounting for horizontal polarization is only supported by the Lucent Technologies 14 dBi Directional Antenna and 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna. NOTE:
For optimal wireless performance you must always verify that the polarization on both ends of the wireless link is the same for both antennas. Consult the corresponding appendices for instructions on alternating the antenna polarization. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-13 Preparing for Installation Overview of the Outdoor Installation Antenna Cable Routing The antenna cable must be routed and fixed in such a way to clear the passage area for installation technicians. All connectors that are located outdoors, must have a weatherproof seal. You are advised to seal connectors only after you have completed final radio tests. 2-14 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Preparing for Installation Before Climbing the Roof... Before Climbing the Roof... Before you start installation check whether you have all hardware components required to setup an outdoor antenna link. For each side of a wireless outdoor antenna link you will need:
1. One Outdoor Router or Outdoor Router Client. 2. One ORiNOCO PC Card. 3. One ORiNOCO Cable Assembly (to connect item 2 to item 4). 4. One ORiNOCO Surge Arrester. 5. One Lucent Technologies low-loss antenna cable. 6. One ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna 7. Weather-proofing electrical tape. If any of the items is missing, or if there are signs of shipment damage, please inform your supplier. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 2-15 Determine Range & Clearance Contents Introduction Determine the Outdoor Range Type of Outdoor Antenna Equipment Determine the Maximum Range I I Data Speed of the Wireless Link Determine the Cable Factor Determine the Clearance Factor Examples Point-to-Point Links I Calculate the Clearance effect on Range I Calculate the Cable effect on Range Point-to-MultiPoint Links 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-15 Determine Range &
Clearance Introduction When you read about wireless outdoor products, you will often encounter the terms output power of the radio and gain of the antenna equipment as measures for the strength of the transmitted signal. I Output Power of radio equipment is often subject to maximum limits as defined by local radio regulations (see Appendix G Certified Outdoor Solutions). Consequently Output Power is not by definition the way to enhance wireless performance. I High gain antennas are larger in size than low gain antennas, and are characterized by a narrow focus of the radio beam. These two characteristics make it more difficult to aim the antennas, and/or adjust antenna alignment to optimize the performance of the wireless point-to-point link. The Lucent Technologies outdoor solution is based upon the following principles:
I An output power and antenna gain that comply with the maximum limits as defined by local governing bodies concerning radio transmissions. I Enhanced radio sensitivity for optimal receive quality of ORiNOCO radio signals transmitted by remote antennas. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-1 Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range Determine the Outdoor Range The range of your outdoor antenna installation is closely related to a number of different factors. To allow you to determine the range of the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router antenna system in your situation, we have defined the formula listed below:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor I Maximum Range identifies the theoretical maximum that could be achieved under optimal circumstances using the available ORiNOCO Outdoor products according to their specs and in compliance with local radio regulations. This value can be read from Table 3-1 or Table 3-2, according to the country where the antenna system will be installed. I Cable Factor identifies a corrective percentage value that compensates additional cable loss related to the type of cables applied at both ends of the wireless link. The Cable Factor value can be read from Table 3-3 on page 3-7. I Clearance Factor identifies a corrective percentage value that should be applied in case the signal path of your wireless link does not provide the minimum clearance listed in the Maximum Range table. The Clearance Factor can be read from Figure 3-2 on page 3-11. An example on how to use this formula is described in the Examples on page 3-13.
CAUTION:
This formula should only be used as a rule of thumb to asses the possible range that could be achieved in your situation, and/or to select the type and height of the antenna installations. Always perform on-site measurements to validate the results from the range calculation. To perform such measurements you can use the OR Manager Wireless Link test option as described in the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide". 3-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range Determine the Maximum Range The maximum range of your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router antenna system is based on the:
I Type of Outdoor Antenna Equipment (page 3-3) I Data Speed of the Wireless Link (page 3-7) I Clearance of the Signal Path (see Determine the Clearance Factor on page 3-8). NOTE:
The values listed in this section are based upon calculations that assume optimal radio conditions. They do not represent a guarantee that the same maximum distance can be achieved at your location. Different performance figures may result from:
I I I I I Incorrect alignment of antennas (see Antenna Alignment on page 2-12). Polarization mismatch of the antennas. Sources of interference or unexpected reflections in the signal path that affect the communications quality (see Antenna Placement on page 2-8). Severe weather conditions such as heavy rain or snow fall, or strong winds. Seasonal influences such as leaves on trees, or icing on the antennas. Type of Outdoor Antenna Equipment As described in the previous chapters, Lucent Technologies offers different types of outdoor antennas, and cable lengths to design your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router outdoor antenna installation. I The directional antennas provide maximum range, but due to their narrow signal beam width, these antennas require precise antenna alignment to achieve optimal performance. The higher the antenna gain the more precise the alignment should be. Directional antennas are typically used to connect:
Two Remote Outdoor Routers in a Point-to-Point link. One Remote Outdoor Router (satellite) to one Central Outdoor Router
(base) in a Point-to-Multipoint link. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-3 Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range I The omni-directional antennas, have by nature an omni directional azimuth pattern which makes these antennas easy to install. There is also a gain beam width relation for omni-antennas: the higher the gain of the omni-
antenna the narrower the vertical beam width. In a hilly terrain a 7dBi omni antenna can/will be a better solution then the 10 dBi omni-antenna. I The 12 dBi wide-angle antenna is a good solution for the Central Outdoor Router (base) antenna in hilly terrain. It combines a wide opening angle with relative high gain. The mounting brackets allow tilting of the antenna. For beamwidth and gain characteristics of the various antennas, please consult the appendices of this document that describe each antenna in more detail. The length of the antenna cable also has an impact on the maximum range that can be achieved with the antenna combination (see Determine the Cable Factor on page 3-7). Subject to local radio regulations that in a number of countries limit the maximum output power, Lucent Technologies offers different outdoor antenna products in the various countries over the world. Therefore you will need to consult the table that matches the radio regulations as apply in your country:
I Table 3-1 on page 3-5, for the USA and Canada and any other country that adheres to the radio regulations as defined by the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC). I Table 3-2 on page 3-6, for all European countries, Japan, and any other country that adheres to the radio regulations as defined by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) and MPT. 3-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3
5 Table 3-1 Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products Antennas 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna1 14 dBi Directional Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Speed Range 1 Mb/s 240 km 149mi 170 km 105mi 5.5 Mb/s 120 km 2 Mb/s 74mi 11 Mb/s 85 km 2 Mb/s 1 Mb/s 52mi 74 km 46mi 54 km 33mi 5.5 Mb/s 38 km 23mi 11 Mb/s 27 km 16mi Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance 1200 m 4000 ft. 610 m 2000 ft. 320 m 1050 ft. 180 m 590 ft. 150 m 490 ft. 85 m 280 ft. 50 m 164 ft. 35 m 115 ft. 74 km 46mi 54 km 33mi 38 km 23mi 27 km 16mi 24 km 15mi 17 km 10mi 12 km 7.5mi 8.5 km 5.3mi 60 km 37mi 42 km 26mi 30 km 18mi 21 km 13mi 19 km 12mi 13 km 8.0mi 9.5 km 5.9mi 6.7 km 4.2mi 150 m 490 ft. 85 m 280 ft. 50 m 164 ft. 35 m 115 ft. 30 m 98 ft. 21 m 69 ft. 16 m 52 ft. 13 m 43 ft. 101 m 331 ft. 61 m 200 ft. 39 m 128 ft. 27 m 89 ft. 24 m 79 ft. 18 m 59 ft. 14 m 46 ft. 11 m 36 ft. 10 dBi Omni-
7 dBi Omni-
Directional Base Station Antenna Directional Base Station Antenna Range Clearance Range Clearance 48 km 30mi 34 km 21mi 24 km 15mi 17 km 10mi 15 km 9.3mi 11 km 6.8mi 7.6 km 4.7mi 5.5 km 3.4mi 34 km 21mile 24 km 15mile 17 km 10mile 12 km 7.5mile 11 km 6.8mile 7.5 km 4.7mile 5.5 km 3.4mile 4.0 km 2.5mile 70 m 230 ft. 45 m 148 ft. 30 m 98 ft. 21 m 69 ft. 20 m 66 ft. 15 m 49 ft. 12 m 39 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 45 m 148 ft. 30 m 98 ft. 20 m 66 ft. 16 m 52 ft. 15 m 49 ft. 12 m 39 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 8 m 26 ft. 1 The maximum ranges for the 24 dBi Grid antennas are calculated values. Maximum Ranges were only tested up to 110 km. All values in Table 3-1 are based on the use of the Standard black-colored ORiNOCO PC Card, and 6m (20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 10 mm. (0.4 in.) on both ends of the antenna link. i O R N O C O O u t d o o r A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e t D e e r m n e i t h e O u d o o r t R a n g e i D e t e r m n e R a n g e
C e a r a n c e l 3
6 Table 3-2 Maximum Range for ETSI/FR/JP Products Antennas 14 dBi Directional Antenna1 14 dBi Directional Antenna1 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna2 2 Mb/s Data Speed Range Clearance Range Clearance Range 1 Mb/s 5.5 km 3.4mi 4.0 km 2.5mi 2.7 km 1.7mi 2.0 km 1.2mi 7 km 4.3mi 5 km 3.1mi 3.5 km 2.2mi 2.5 km 1.6mi 6.9 km 4.3mi 4.9 km 3.0mi 3.5 km 2.2mi 2.5 km 1.6mi 11 m 36 ft. 9 m 30 ft. 7.5 m 25 ft. 6 m 20 ft. 11 m 36 ft. 9 m 30 ft. 7.5 m 25 ft. 6.5 m 22 ft. 5.5 Mb/s 11 Mb/s 10 dBi Omni-
Directional Base Station Antenna2 Clearance 9.5 m 31 ft. 8 m 26 ft. 6 m 20 ft. 5.5 m 18 ft. 7 dBi Omni-
Directional Base Station Antenna2 Range Clearance 4.0 km 2.5mi 2.7km 1.7mi 1.9 km 1.2mi 1.4 km 0.9 mi 8 m 26 ft. 6.6 m 22 ft. 5.5 m 18 ft. 5.6 m 18 ft. 1 2 In combination with Red-colored Fixed Wireless PC Card and a 6 m (20 ft.) cable with diameter of 5 mm (0.2 in.) In combination with Red-colored Fixed Wireless PC Card and a 6 m (20 ft.) cable with diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in.) NOTE:
All values listed in Table 3-2 are based on the correct use of the Red-colored Fixed Wireless PC Card and cables as indicated in the corresponding footnote(s). Using different cards might violate ETSI radio regulations (see also Selecting the Right Card & Cables on page G-3) i O R N O C O O u t d o o r A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e t D e e r m n e i t h e O u d o o r t R a n g e i D e t e r m n e R a n g e
C e a r a n c e l Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range Data Speed of the Wireless Link By default, the radio of ORiNOCO Outdoor Router products will transmit at the highest available transmit rate. As data transmissions at lower speeds can travel larger distances than transmissions at the highest transmit rates, the ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers allow you to choose a lower data rate to increase the maximum range. For information about customizing the transmit rate of your Outdoor Router, please consult the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide". To help you to determine the appropriate tuning settings, we have listed the range values that apply to the various transmit rates in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Determine the Cable Factor The range value calculations listed in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 were based on antenna installations where both antennas were connected to a 6m/20 ft. cable. I If this is the case in your situation, the Cable Factor for your installation is 100%. I If you are using different cables, you will need to determine the Cable Factor from Table 3-3 below, to calculate the probable range for your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router installation. Table 3-3 Calculate the Cable Factor This Location 6m. (20 ft.)/10 mm (0.4 in.) 6m. (20 ft.)/5 mm (0.2 in.) 15m. (50 ft.) 22m. (75 ft.) Remote Location 6m. (20 ft.)/10 mm (0.4 in.) 6m. (20 ft.)/5 mm (0.2 in.) 15m. (50 ft.) 22m. (75 ft.) 6m. (20 ft.)/5 mm (0.2 in.) 15m. (50 ft.) 22m. (75 ft.) 15m. (50 ft.) 22m. (75 ft.) 22m. (75 ft.) Cable Factor 100%
81%
81%
67%
66%
66%
54%
66%
54%
45%
NOTE:
When using Table 3-3 in countries that adhere to the ETSI regulations, please note that the maximum ranges as listed in Table 3-2 do not always use cable factor 100%. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-7 Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range This is due to local radio regulations and legislation that do not allow the use of the 6 m. (20 ft.)/10 mm (0.4 in.) cables in ETSI countries, France or Japan. See the example on Point-to-MultiPoint Links (page 3-15) for more details.
CAUTION:
The 6m (20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 5mm (0.2 in.) can be used with all antenna types. The Cable Loss of these cables equals the value of the 15m.(50ft.) cables. Use of the 6m (20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 10mm (0.4 in.) is subject to local radio regulations. Consult Appendix G Introduction for information whether you are allowed to use the 6m/
10mm cable in your country in combination with the antenna of your choice. Determine the Clearance Factor For optimal performance of your outdoor antenna link, it is important that the signal path between the two ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers provides sufficient clearance. NOTE:
A wireless outdoor antenna link that lacks sufficient clearance will suffer from poor performance, which is typically perceived as slow network response times. Although your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router equipment will automatically retransmit every data frame that got lost due to an out-of-range situation or frame collision, the larger the number of retransmissions attempts, the lower the throughput efficiency of your wireless link. This section will explain how to determine the clearance that applies in your environment, and (if applicable) the effect of insufficient clearance on the range of your outdoor antenna link. In Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation we described the shape of the radio beam being bulged in the middle, as pictured in Figure 3-1 on page 3-9. 3-8 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range Figure 3-1 Fresnel Zone If any significant part of this bulged zone is obstructed, a portion of the radio energy will be lost, which may affect the performance of your wireless link in terms of maximum range and/or transmit rate. Looking at Figure 3-1 you will see two variables that determine the shape of the radio beam, also referred to as Fresnel Zone:
a. The distance between the antennas b. The clearance required for optimal performance, where clearance should be interpreted as:
I Vertical clearance above the ground and the highest buildings or objects in the signal path, and I Horizontal clearance from neighboring buildings and objects in the signal path. For optimal range and throughput performance, you must ensure that your antenna installation provides maximum clearance in both horizontal and vertical direction. The minimum clearance for the various antenna combinations and distances is listed in the grey-shaded columns of Table 3-1 and Table 3-2, where clearance should be interpreted as follows:
ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-9 Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range I In open areas without obstacles in the signal path, clearance is measured as height above the surface of the earth. For example, if the antenna is mounted on the roof, this height includes the height of the building plus the height of the mast above the rooftop. I In areas with obstacles in the signal path between the two antenna(s), clearance should be measured as height above the highest obstacle(s) in the signal path. I In dense urban areas, the clearance should be measured as height above the highest rooftop or any other obstacle(s) in the signal path between the two antenna(s). Looking at the minimum clearance requirements as identified in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2, you may realize that local authorities, the proprietor of the premises, or other reasons may not allow you to set up an antenna mast that will enable you to meet the listed clearance requirement. In such situations, you may not be able to achieve a full line-of-sight clearance. At the same time however, you may not even need full clearance, since the distance that your wireless outdoor installation needs to cover is less than the listed maximum range. To determine the effect of insufficient signal path clearance, you will need to determine the Clearance Factor as described below, and calculate its effect on the range for your antenna installation using the formula described in Determine the Outdoor Range on page 3-2. I If the clearance for your antenna installation is equal to, or better than the minimum clearance requirement identified in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2, the Clearance Factor for your installation is 100%. I If your actual clearance is less than the minimum clearance identified in Table 3-1 or Table 3-2, you will need use the diagram pictured in Figure 3-2 to determine the actual range that will apply in your situation. 3-10 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Determine Range & Clearance Determine the Outdoor Range Figure 3-2 Clearance Factor Diagram NOTE:
The Clearance Factor Diagram should be used as a rule-of-thumb for estimating the probable range in case the clearance requirements are not fully met. In real life using FCC approved products, you will also find it almost impossible to achieve the level of clearance for maximum range. For your convenience we have also included Table 3-4 to provide an example in conditions where the more typical clearance is 10 meters
(33 ft.) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-11 Table 3-4 FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m (33 ft.) Clearance 24 dBi Directional 14 dBi Directional 10 dBi Omni-
7 dBi Omni-
Parabolic Grid Directional Base Station Antenna Range Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance Range Clearance Directional Base Station Antenna Antenna Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 19.0 km 11.8mi 16.9 km 10.5mi 14.4 km 8.9mi 12.8 km 8.0mi 12.0 km 7.5mi 10.2 km 6.3mi 8.7 km 5.4mi 7.1 km 4.4mi 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 17.3 km 10.7mi 15.4 km 9.6mi 13.1 km 8.1mi 11.2 km 7.0mi 10.9 km 6.8mi 9.3 km 5.8mi 7.6 km 4.7mi 6.1km 3.8mi 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 15.8 km 9.8mi 14.1 km 8.8mi 12.0 km 7.5mi 10.2 km 6.3mi 9.5 km 5.9mi 8.1 km 5.0mi 6.6 km 4.1mi 5.5 km 3.4 mi 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 14.1 km 8.8mi 12.0 km 7.5mi 10.2 km 6.3mi 8.7 km 5.4mi 8.1 km 5.0mi 6.6 km 4.1mi 5.5 km 3.4 mi 4.0 km 2.5 mi 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. 10 m 33 ft. Antennas 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna Data Speed 1 Mb/s 2 Mb/s 26.2 km 16.3 mi 24.5 km 15.2mi 5.5 Mb/s 21.8 km 13.5mi 19.4 km 12.0mi 19.0 km 11.8mi 16.9 km 10.5mi 5.5 Mb/s 14.4 km 11 Mb/s 1 Mb/s 2 Mb/s 11 Mb/s 8.9mi 12.8 km 8.0mi 3
1 2 i O R N O C O O u t d o o r A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e t D e e r m n e i t h e O u d o o r t R a n g e i D e t e r m n e R a n g e
C e a r a n c e l Determine Range & Clearance Examples Examples Point-to-Point Links Suppose you are installing a wireless point-to-point link between two Remote Outdoor Routers as pictured in Figure 3-3 below, where:
I Both sites have been equipped with a 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna, connected via 6m.(20 ft.)/10 mm antenna cables. I The distance between site a and b is 25 km. (15.3 mi.). I The site is located in the US, which allows the use of FCC approved equipment. Figure 3-3 Calculating the Point-to-Point Range Looking at Table 3-1 on page 3-5, we learn that a High Speed link between two 24 dBi Directional Grid Antennas may cover a maximum distance of 85 Km.(52 mi.), provided that the signal path clearance is 180 m. (590 ft.) or better. Now lets calculate the probable range for this example using the introduced formula:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor Calculate the Clearance effect on Range In the example pictured in Figure 3-3 on page 3-13, we see a set of trees in the signal path. Lets suppose the clearance (c) between these trees and the signal path is only be 45 m (148 ft.). ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-13 Determine Range & Clearance Examples 1. Using a calculator we can easily determine that this 45 m (148 ft.) is about 25% of the required 180 m. (590 ft.) clearance for maximum range. 2. Looking at the Clearance Factor Diagram pictured in Figure 3-2 on 3. page 3-11 we can see that 25% actual clearance, equals a Clearance Factor of 32%. If we apply this Clearance Factor to the range calculation formula, your probable range would become:
Range= 85 Km (52 mi.) x 32% x 100% = 27.2 Km (16.6 mi.) This might satisfy your requirements for High Speed data transmissions between the two ORiNOCO Office Routers. However the safety margin looks pretty tight. If we would base the calculation on transmissions at Medium speed, your range calculation would look as follows:
1. Looking at Table 3-1 on page 3-5, we learn that a Medium Speed link between two 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antennas may cover a maximum distance of 120 Km.(74 mi.), provided that the signal path clearance is 320 m. (1050 ft.). 2. As mentioned above however, our actual clearance is only 45 m (148 ft.); 14% of the required 320 m. (1050 ft.). Range= 120 Km (74 mi.) x 25% x 100% = 30 Km (18.6 mi.) This result indicates that you can safely set the transmit rate of your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router to Medium Speed for reliable wireless communications. Optionally you may wish to run the Wireless Link Test option of your OR Manager program to determine whether the High Speed option might provide reliable wireless connections as well. Calculate the Cable effect on Range We presumed that at both sites the antenna were connected via 6m.(20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in.). If we would replace this cable at building b, with a longer 22 m. (75 ft.) cable, we would need to look at the Cable Factor effect of this longer cable. 1. Table 3-3 on page 3-7 tells us that this new cabling combination would result 2. in a Cable Factor of 67%. If we apply this Cable Factor to the range calculation formula again, your probable range would become:
Range= 120 Km.(74 mi.) x 25% x 67% = 20.1 Km (12.5 mi.) 3-14 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Determine Range & Clearance Examples This result indicates that the effect of this cable will most likely prevent your wireless link from operating at both High and Medium Speed. In such situations you are advised to:
I Relocate the Outdoor Router hardware to a location that allows you to use a shorter cable length. I Increase the height of the antenna on the mast and/or install taller antenna masts to increase the signal path clearance. I Trade-off data speed versus range, and recalculate the ranges that could be achieved at lower Transmit Rates. Alternatively, you may decide to perform on-site diagnostic measurements to validate the results of this calculation. Please consult the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" for information about using the Wireless Link Test feature to perform on-site diagnostic measurements. The "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" is available in electronic format on the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router CD-ROM. Point-to-MultiPoint Links Suppose you are installing a wireless Point-to-Multipoint link between one ORiNOCO Central Outdoor Router and two Remote Outdoor Routers as pictured in Figure 3-4 below, where:
I The Central Outdoor Router in building c is connected to a 7 dBi Omni-
Directional Base Station Antenna, and I The two remote sites a and b have been equipped with a 14 dBi Directional Antenna. I All sites have been connected via 15m.(50 ft.) antenna cables. I The site is located in the Europe, which requires you to use ETSI approved equipment1. 1 In France you may only use equipment based on the FR channel-set. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-15 Determine Range & Clearance Examples Figure 3-4 Calculating the Point-to-Multipoint Range For this type of outdoor antenna installation you will need to determine the range for each link individually, i.e. the range from the building c to building a, and from the building c to building b. NOTE:
In this example we will only demonstrate the calculation for the link between building a and c. However as different clearance factors may apply for each of these links, you are advised to calculate the actual range for each link individually when designing a real outdoor antenna link. For the purpose of this example we presume that:
I The antenna installation will be installed in a dense urban area, where the distance between building a and building c is 0.5 Km.(0.3 mi.). I The actual clearance is 3m. (9.9ft.), being the height of the antennas on the mast2. Now lets calculate the probable range for this example using the introduced formula:
Range = Maximum Range x Cable Factor x Clearance Factor 2 According to the information about dense urban areas described in Determine the Clearance Factor on page 3-8, we use the height of the antennas above the roof-tops of both buildings to determine the level of actual clearance. 3-16 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Determine Range & Clearance Examples 1. Looking at Table 3-2 on page 3-6, we learn that a High Speed link between a 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna and a 14 dBi Directional Antenna may cover a maximum distance of 1.4 Km. (0.9 mi.), provided that the signal path clearance is 5.6m. (18 ft.) or better. 2. Using a calculator we can easily determine that the actual clearance of 3m.
(9.9ft.) is about 75% of the required 5.6m. (18 ft.) which equals a Clearance Factor of 70% (see Figure 3-2 on page 3-11). 3. The maximum range calculation in Table 3-2 on page 3-6 was based on the use of:
I I a 6m. (20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 5mm (0.2 in.). for the site with the 14 dBi Directional Antenna, and a 6m. (20 ft.) cables with a diameter of 10mm. (0.4 in.) for the 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna. In other words, the Cable Factor for the maximum range calculation, already represents a value of 81% (see Table 3-3 on page 3-7). However since the site as pictured in Figure 3-4 on page 3-16 site is actually using two 15m (50 ft.) cables, Table 3-3 identifies the Cable Factor as being 66%. You actual Cable Factor will be 66% Cable Factor divided by the maximum range cable factor: (66%/81%)= 81%. If we import all this information into the range calculation formula, your probable range for High Speed transmissions would become:
Range= 1.4 Km. (0.9 mi.) x 70% x (66%/81%) = 0.8 Km (0.5 mi.) 4. For campus type environments, this range will probably be sufficient to connect multiple buildings. However if you would need to cover a larger distance, you can either:
I Relocate the Outdoor Router hardware to a location that allows you to use a shorter cable length. I Increase the height of the antenna on the mast and/or install taller antenna masts to increase the signal path clearance. I Trade-off data speed versus range, and recalculate the ranges that could be achieved at lower Transmit Rates. Alternatively, you may decide to perform on-site diagnostic measurements to validate the results of this calculation. Please consult the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" for information about using the Wireless Link Test feature to perform on-site diagnostic measurements. This guide is available in electronic format on the ORiNOCO Outdoor Router CD-ROM, or can be downloaded from the ORiNOCO website at: http://
www.lucent.com/orinoco. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 3-17 Installing the Antenna Contents Planning Antenna Installation Safety Precautions Installation Overview Mounting the Antenna Connecting the Antenna Cable Sealing the Cable Connectors 4 4-1 4-1 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-7 Installing the Antenna Planning Antenna Installation Carefully plan the day for your outdoor antenna installation. Do not install the antenna in wet or windy conditions, during a thunderstorm or when the area where the equipment will be installed is covered with ice or snow. The grounding system for the antenna mast, Outdoor Router hardware and ORiNOCO Surge Arrester should be installed before the cable from the antenna is connected to the lightning arrestor. This will protect your ORiNOCO Outdoor System in case lightning should strike the antenna during installation. Familiarize yourself with the antenna and the antenna specific mounting instructions prior to climbing any roof or ladder. Installing and testing all equipment before beginning the actual rooftop installation will help you to determine whether all required equipment and items are available and are functioning properly. To verify the equipment prior to installation, you may need to skip this chapter and first proceed with the guidelines as described in the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide". The "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" is shipped with the Outdoor Router device, and can be downloaded from the ORiNOCO website at:
http://www.lucent.com/orinoco. Safety Precautions Please read this section carefully before beginning the installation. All requirements listed below should be satisfied prior to starting installation of your ORiNOCO outdoor antennas. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 4-1 Installing the Antenna Planning Antenna Installation
DANGER:
The ORiNOCO Outdoor Router outdoor antennas are intended for mounting on a roof, or the side of a building. Installation shall not be attempted by someone who is not trained or experienced in this type of work.The antenna has to be installed by a suitably trained professional installation technician or a qualified antenna installation service. The site pre-requisites have to be checked by a person familiar with the national electrical code, and other regulations governing this type of installation. Outdoor antennas and antenna cables are electrical conductors. Transients or electrostatic discharges that may occur at the antenna (for example a lightning strike during thunderstorms) may damage your electronic equipment and cause personal injury or death to persons touching the exposed metal connectors of the antenna cable. When installing, disconnecting or replacing one of the cabling components, you must ensure at all times that each exposed metal connectors of the antenna cabling system will be grounded locally during the work. Do not install this antenna where there is any possibility of contact with high-voltage arc-over from power cables or service drops to buildings. The antenna, supporting mast and/or tower must not be close to any power lines during installation, removal or in the event of part of the system should accidentally fail. Apply a Danger label to a plainly visible area of the antenna support structure. 1. Do not climb rooftops in wet or windy conditions, during a thunderstorm or when the area where the equipment will be installed is covered with ice or snow. 2. Do not touch antennas, surge arresters and/or antenna cables during a thunderstorm. 3. The location where you will install the antenna(s) must be at a safe distance from power lines or telephone lines. The safe distance should be at least twice the height of the antenna mast plus the height of the antenna. 4. Antennas shall be mounted in such a manner to minimize the potential for human contact during normal operation. In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna shall not be less than 20cm (8 inches) during normal operation. 4-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Installing the Antenna Planning Antenna Installation 5. The low-loss antenna cable that will connect the antenna with the lightning arrestor must be at least 1m (3 ft.) away from any high voltage or high current cable. 6. Check whether the antenna mast and its guy wires or wall bracket are positioned correctly and secured properly to the roof or wall(s). 7. Check whether the grounding system for the antenna mast, the Outdoor Router hardware and ORiNOCO Surge Arrester have been installed. The grounding system must comply with the requirements as described in Grounding System on page 2-12. Always consult a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to whether the antenna mast, the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester and Outdoor Router hardware are properly grounded. 8. The antenna cable between the antenna and the lightning arrestor must be grounded at all times. If the cable is disconnected at one end for some reason (for example, to replace the lightning arrestor) then you must ensure that the exposed metal connector of the cable is grounded locally during the work. Installation Overview The installation process can be summarized in the following 10 steps. 1. Verify that the support structure for the antenna has been connected to the grounding system. If this is not the case you should do so now. 2. Connect the exposed metal connectors of the low-loss antenna cable to the grounding system. 3. Mount the antenna to the support structure, following the guidelines as described for your antenna in Appendices B through F. 4. Connect the antenna cable to the antenna 5. Route the antenna cable to the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester that has been installed indoors. 6. Connect the antenna cable to the Surge Arrester. 7. Connect the Cable Assembly to the Surge Arrester. 8. Connect the opposite end of the Cable Assembly to the connector in the extended part of the ORiNOCO card that protrudes from the host device. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 4-3 Installing the Antenna Planning Antenna Installation 9. Run the Wireless Link Test diagnostics of the OR Manager program to aim the antenna and verify optimal placement. 10. Once the antenna is correctly positioned, and you have verified the installation works properly, secure all cables and use weather-proofing tape to seal all outdoor connectors.
! WARNING:
When you need to remove or relocate the antenna, follow the Safety Precautions on page 4-1, and follow the steps listed above in exactly the reverse order. 4-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Installing the Antenna Mounting the Antenna Mounting the Antenna Lucent Technologies offers multiple antennas to setup a wireless link. As the mounting procedures for the various antennas may differ from one another, please consult the corresponding Appendix for the antenna type that you plan to install:
I Appendix B 14 dBi Directional Antenna I Appendix C 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna I Appendix D 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna I Appendix E 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna I Appendix F 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna When mounting multiple antennas on a single mast, use the following methods to minimize the influence of cross-talk interference between the antennas:
I Place your antennas as far apart as you can. I Alternate the mounting of directional antennas for vertical and horizontal polarization. Consult the mounting instructions for your antenna as described in the appendices listed above for options and instructions to mount the antennas for different polarization. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 4-5 Installing the Antenna Connecting the Antenna Cable Connecting the Antenna Cable Once the antenna is properly installed, you can connect the antenna to the ORiNOCO Wireless System via the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester. 1. First connect the antenna cable to the antenna 2. Secure the antenna cable to the mast such that the cable connectors do not support the full weight of the cable. 3. Connect the opposite end of the antenna cable to the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester. NOTE:
To avoid damage to the antenna cable and connectors, refrain from using appliances to tighten the cable connectors 4. Prior to securing the cable along its complete length, run the Wireless Link Test diagnostics of the OR Manager program to analyze wireless performance and optimal placement of the outdoor antenna (see Figure 2-4 on page 2-13). How to use this program is described in the "ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide" that was shipped with the Outdoor Router hardware, and/or can be downloaded from the ORiNOCO website at: http://www.lucent.com/orinoco. If required, adjust the direction of the antenna. 5. 6. Once the installation has been fully tested, tighten the nuts of the antenna to lock the antenna into its position.
CAUTION:
Avoid overtightening of the connectors, and nuts and screws used to mount the antenna, to prevent damage to your ORiNOCO Outdoor Router hardware. 7. Secure the cable along its complete length using cable ties or electrical tape to properly strain relieve the antenna connector. No part of the cable should be allowed to hang free. This is especially important for those parts that are routed outside the building. 8. Proceed as described below to weather-proof all outdoor coax connectors. 4-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Installing the Antenna Connecting the Antenna Cable Sealing the Cable Connectors Most problems associated with wireless outdoor installations are related to degrading performance due to the effects of corrosion of the antenna cable and cable connectors. To avoid this type of problems, you must always seal the cable connectors that are located outdoors using the weather proofing tape provided. You are advised to seal the connectors only after you have verified optimal alignment of the antennas using the Wireless Link Test as described in the
"ORiNOCO OR Manager - Users Guide". Doing so will enable you to adjust antenna placement and cable routing without removing the tape. 1. Prepare the cable and connectors so that they are free from dust, dirt and grease. 2. Attach the tip of the weather proofing tape to the cable just above the connector. 3. Holding the tape in its position, now stretch the tape and wind it half-lapped around the cable and connectors to form a void-free joint. The degree of stretch may vary in different sections of the joint, as long as the overlaps accomplish a void-free application. To protect the weather-proofing stretch tape from the effects of Ultra-Violet (UV) radiation (for example from direct sun-light), you should protect the joint with two half-lapped layers of any vinyl plastic electrical tape. Alternatively, you can apply silicone sealer to protect the weather-proofing tape from sunlight, rain and other weather conditions. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 4-7 The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide A-1 The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components To connect your Outdoor Router hardware to an outdoor antenna installation you will need the following cabling components as pictured on the right side of this page:
a. The ORiNOCO Cable Assembly b. The ORiNOCO Surge Arrester c. A Low-Loss Antenna Cable d. One of the outdoor antennas described in Appendices B through F. When purchasing new ORiNOCO Outdoor Router products, each of the components listed above will be equipped with Standard N-Type connectors. When ordering separate components, for example as a spare part or replacement to previously purchased Lucent ORiNOCO outdoor antenna equipment carefully read the note on the following page to ensure that you order components with an N-Type connector that matches the other parts of your Outdoor Antenna Cabling System. Selecting the Correct Connector-Type All cabling components of the ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna system come with Standard-N type connectors as pictured in Table A-1 below. A-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components Table A-1 Standard N-Type Connector Diagram NOTE:
Previously marketed ORiNOCO outdoor antenna systems in FCC regulated countries (e.g. USA & Canada) were shipped with a different cabling system, identified by Reverse Polarity-N connectors (pictured in Table A-2 on page A-4). If you are looking for replacement parts, or wish to extend a previously installed Reverse Polarity-N cabling system, please consult your Authorized ORiNOCO Reseller. You can use Table A-2 to:
I Determine the type of cabling system currently installed. I Determine what type of spare part or converter you will need if you intend to upgrade or replace a previously installed outdoor cabling system. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide A-3 The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components Table A-2 Reverse Polarity-N Cabling Diagram
DANGER:
Outdoor antennas and antenna cables are electrical conductors. Transients or electrostatic discharges that may occur at the antenna (for example a lightning strike during thunderstorms) may damage your electronic equipment and cause personal injury or death to persons touching the exposed metal connectors of the antenna cable. To avoid damage and personal injury, the entire antenna cabling system must be grounded at all times. When installing, disconnecting or replacing one of the cabling components, you must ensure at all times that each exposed metal connectors of the antenna cabling system will be grounded locally during the work. For example when mounting or replacing the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester:
1. First connect each of the connectors of the low-loss antenna cables to the grounding system. 2. Next connect the cable connector of the ORiNOCO Cable Assembly to the grounding system. A-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide The Antenna Cabling System The Outdoor Cabling Components 3. Finally connect the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester to the grounding system. Before you proceed, verify that each of the items is properly grounded, and that the ground will not interrupted when disconnecting one of the antenna system components. Check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to whether the surge arrester, and cable connectors are properly grounded. Only after you have verified that each of the items is properly grounded, replace the surge arrester and re-connect the cables in exactly the reverse order of the previous steps. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide A-5 The Antenna Cabling System ORiNOCO Cable Assembly ORiNOCO Cable Assembly The ORiNOCO Cable Assembly is the Lucent Technologies proprietary cable to connect ORiNOCO PC Cards to an outdoor antenna system. On the end that is connected to the ORiNOCO card, the cable assembly has the Lucent Technologies proprietary connector. The N-Type connector at the opposite end will match the polarity of the N-
connectors of the other outdoor antenna cabling system components. Table A-3 Specifications Cable Assembly Mechanical Length Connectors1 Operating Temperature Electrical Frequency Range Insertion Loss 50 cm (19.5 in.) I Proprietary ORiNOCO PC Card Connector I Standard-N (Male)
- 40C to +85C 800-2500 MHz 0.9 dB 1 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2
CAUTION:
The Lucent proprietary connector that fits into the ORiNOCO PC Card has been designed for fixed installations only, allowing for occasionally disconnecting and reconnecting the outdoor antenna cabling system when needed. Repeatedly (dis)connecting the Cable Assembly, will wear out the connectors and void Warranty of the Cable Assembly product. A-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide The Antenna Cabling System ORiNOCO Surge Arrester ORiNOCO Surge Arrester The ORiNOCO Surge Arrester (sometimes also referred to as Lightning Protector) can protect your sensitive ORiNOCO equipment from high-voltage surges caused by discharge and transients at the antennas. Figure A-1 Mounting the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester To mount the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester:
1. Determine a suitable location for the bracket (item B) as described in Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation. 2. Use the screws (item C) to attach the bracket the wall. 3. Apply a ring-terminal to the ground wire, and use the bolt, lock-washer and nut (item D) to connect the ground-wire (item E) to the mounting bracket. The ring-terminal and ground wire are not included, but must be installed by a certified electrician that is familiar with national electricity & safety codes, according the instructions described under Grounding System on page 2-12 4. Next insert the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester (item A into the bracket as pictured in Figure A-1. 5. Use the hex-nut (item F) to secure the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester in its position, and ensure that the Protector is properly connected to the grounding system. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide A-7 The Antenna Cabling System ORiNOCO Surge Arrester
! WARNING:
To avoid damage to electronic equipment and your ORiNOCO equipment always apply the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester between the outdoor antenna installation and the Outdoor Router hardware or other computing device that is connected to the outdoor antenna(s). Table A-4 Specifications Surge Arrester Mechanical Size Height Diameter Weight Connectors1 Operating Temperature Electrical Frequency Range Insertion Loss Surge Current Nominal Impedance 69 mm (2.7 in.) 26 mm (1 in.) 133 g (4.7 oz.) Standard-N (Female on both ends)
- 40C to +85C 800-2500 MHz 0.2 dB 2000 Amp 50 Ohms 1 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 A-8 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide The Antenna Cabling System Low-Loss Antenna Cable Low-Loss Antenna Cable The low-loss antenna cable is available in three standard lengths. I Specifications 6m (20 ft) Antenna Cable. I Specifications 15m (50 ft) Antenna Cable. I Specifications 22m (75 ft) Antenna Cable.
CAUTION:
To ensure you order the right cable length, carefully determine the distance between the intended locations of the Outdoor Router hardware and outdoor antenna. Table A-5 Specifications 6m (20 ft) Antenna Cable. Mechanical Specifications Length Connectors1 Operating Temperature Diameter2 Weight Bend Radius Electrical Specifications Insertion Loss Total for this cable 6 meter (20 ft) Standard-N (Male on both ends)
- 40C to +85C 5 mm (0.2 in.) 32,75 gram/meter (0.022 lbs/
ft) 50 mm (2 in.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) 101.2 gram/meter (0.068 lbs/ft)) 100 mm (4 in.) 0.55 dB/meter
(16.9 dB/100 feet)
< 4.0 dB 0.22 dB/meter
(6.8 dB/100 feet)
< 2.0 dB 1 2 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 Use of the 10 mm diameter version of this cable is subject to local radio regulations. Consult Appendix G Certified Outdoor Solutions for information whether you are allowed to use this cable in your country. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide A-9 Table A-6 Specifications 15m (50 ft) Antenna Cable Mechanical Specifications Length Connectors1 Operating Temperature Diameter Weight Bend Radius Electrical Specifications Insertion Loss Total for this cable 15 meter (50 ft) Standard-N (Male on both ends)
- 40C to +85C 10 mm (0.4 in.) 101.2 gram/meter (0.068 lbs/ft) 100 mm (4 in.) 0.22 dB/meter (6.8 dB/100 feet)
< 4.0 dB 1 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 Table A-7 Specifications 22m (75 ft) Antenna Cable Mechanical Specifications Length Connectors1 Operating Temperature Diameter Weight Bend Radius Electrical Specifications Insertion Loss Total for this cable 22 meter (75 ft) Standard-N (Male on both ends)
- 40C to +85C 10 mm (0.4 in.) 101.2 gram/meter (0.068 lbs/ft) 100 mm (4 in.) 0.22 dB/meter (6.8 dB/100 feet)
< 5.7 dB 1 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description 14 dBi Directional Antenna is a High-Gain ORiNOCO Antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This antenna is typically used in combination with ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers in Remote slave Mode. The 14 dBi Directional Antenna is a totally enclosed 16 element Yagi antenna that has been designed for point-to-point communications. It has a typical VSWR of 1.5:1 and is less than 2:1 over the entire frequency band. The gain is 14 dBi and the half-power beamwidth is 30 degrees. This antenna is normally mounted on a mast and is vertically polarized. Contents of the Antenna Box I One encapsulated antenna I Metal Backing Plate for the antenna I 2 U-bolts, with 2 bolt heads (for mast mounting) I 4 flat-washers, and 4 nuts
(to attach the antenna to the U-bolts or screws) Mounting the Directional Antenna You can mount the Lucent Technologies 14 dBi Directional Antenna to a mast or a flat vertical surface, such as a wall. In most cases mounting the antenna to a mast will allow for more flexibility in adjusting the height and direction of the antenna to aim it at the opposite end of the wireless link. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide B-1 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description Mounting to a Mast To mount the antenna to a mast proceed as follows:
1. Verify if you have all the items listed below:
I I I The ORiNOCO 2.4 GHz antenna The 2 U-bolts and bolt heads provided The 4 flat washers and 4 nuts provided A socket wrench to tighten the nuts 2. Note the arrows on the mounting plate. 3. Mount the antenna with the arrows pointing up. 4. Attach the antenna to the mast as pictured in Figure B-1 on page B-2, using I the U-bolts and bolt heads, the Metal Backing Plate and nuts. 5. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6.
CAUTION:
Always place flat washers between heads (or nuts) and the plastic mounting plate. Avoid overtightening the nuts and screws to prevent damage to the mounting plate. Figure B-1 Mounting the 14 dBi Antenna to a Mast B-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description Mounting on a Flat Surface For mounting the antenna to a flat vertical surface, you must provide a smooth surface for the antenna mount. On wall surfaces such as brick, block or stucco, use an intermediate surface such as a plywood board or metal plate between the wall and antenna. The intermediate surface will need to be of sufficient strength to prevent distortion of the antenna base when the mounting hardware is tightened. To mount the antenna proceed as follows:
1. Verify if you have all the items listed below:
I I I I I I The ORiNOCO 2.4 GHz antenna
(optional) an intermediate plate 4 plugs and screws 4 flat washers An electric drill A screwdriver to tighten the screws Figure B-2 Mounting the 14 dBi Antenna to a Wall 2. Note the arrows on the mounting plate. 3. Mount the antenna with the arrows pointing up. 4. Attach the antenna using the intermediate plate, Metal Backing Plate and flat washers as shown in Figure B-2. 5. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide B-3 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description
CAUTION:
Always use flat washers between the screws and the plastic mounting plate. Avoid overtightening nuts and screws to prevent damage to the mounting plate. Table B-1 Specifications 14 dBi Directional Antenna Mechanical I Size I Mounting Method Cable I Type I Length I Color Connector1 Electrical I Frequency Range I VSWR I Nominal Impedance I Gain I Front-to-Back Ratio Half-Power Beamwidth I Elevation Plane
(vertical) I Azimuth Plane
(horizontal) I Polarization 45.7 cm (18 in.) I Vertical or horizontal mast with an outside diameter between 28 mm (1.102 in.) and 41 mm (1.625 in.) using u-bolts. I Wall using plugs and screws. RG-58A/U, 50 ohm low-loss coax 80 cm (31.5 in.) White Standard-N (Female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1, 1.5:1 Nominal 50 Ohms 14 dBi greater than 20 dB 30.8 Degrees 31.4 Degrees I Linear Vertical (standard mounting) I Horizontal (when mounted differently - see Mounting the Directional Antenna on page B-1). Antenna Environment I Operating Temperature I Wind/survival
- 40C (-40F) to +60C (140F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph.)2 1 2 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in.) ice. B-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description Figure B-3 Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide B-5 14 dBi Directional Antenna General Description Figure B-4 Elevation Plane (Vertical) B-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications The Lucent Technologies 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band featuring an omni-
directional pattern with a nominal gain of 7 dBi. The pole-type antenna is enclosed in a weatherproof protective covering
(radome). This vertically polarized antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 65 mm (2.5 in). For detailed specifications see Table C-1 on page C-3. Mounting the Omni-directional Antenna You can mount the 7 dBi MHz antenna to a mast only. This antenna uses Vertical Polarization which is the most common type of polarization for omni-
directional antennas. Mounting to a Mast To mount the antenna to a mast proceed as follows:
1. Verify that you have all the items listed below:
I I I I The ORiNOCO 7 dBi Pole Antenna The O-shaped Metal Bracket,. The U-bolt, nuts and lock washers A small wrench to tighten the nuts 2. Position the Bracket (identified as item D in Figure C-1 on page C-2) to the top of the antenna mast (item B). 3. Place the U-bolt (item C) around the antenna mast, and slide its ends through the corresponding holes of the bracket. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide C-1 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications 4. Use the lock-washers (item E) and nuts (item F) to secure the bracket to the mast. Use a wrench to tighten the nuts and ensure the bracket will be fixed to the top of the mast. 5. Next feed the antenna cable of the 7 dBi omni-directional Base Station antenna (item A) through the hole of the mounting bracket. 6. Slide the antenna down, until its metal base is enclosed by the mounting bracket as pictured in Figure C-1. Figure C-1 Mounting the 7 dBi Antenna to a Mast 7. Use a wrench to tighten the bracket bolt (item G) to fix the antenna into its position.
CAUTION:
Avoid overtightening the hose-clip nut to avoid damage to the clip and your antenna. 8. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6 to connect the antenna to the indoor equipment and seal the antenna connectors. C-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Table C-1 Specifications 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Mechanical I Size I Mounting method Connector1 Electrical I Frequency Range I VSWR I Nominal Impedance I Gain I Polarization Antenna Environment I Operating Temperature I Wind/survival 43,2 cm (17 in.) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in.) and 65 mm (2.55 in.) Standard-N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 Nominal 50 Ohms 7 dBi Linear Vertical
- 40C (-40F) to +60C (140F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 1 2 See also Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in.) ice. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide C-3 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure C-2 Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) C-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure C-3 Elevation Plane (Vertical) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide C-5 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications The Lucent Technologies 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band featuring an omni-
directional pattern with a nominal gain of 10 dBi. This antenna is typically used in combination with ORiNOCO/Centrals in Master mode. The pole-type antenna is enclosed in a weatherproof protective covering
(radome). This vertically polarized antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2.0 in). For detailed specifications see Table D-1 on page D-2.
CAUTION:
When selecting an antenna location, please ensure general precautions so as to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast. Mounting Instructions 1. Attach the ferrule of the antenna to the mounting bracket with two u-bolts as shown inFigure D-1 on page D-2. 2. Next use the remaining two u-bolts to attach the mounting bracket to the mast. Tighten nuts to 9 Nm (7 ft.-lbs). 3. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6 to connect the antenna to the indoor equipment and seal the antenna connectors. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide D-1 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure D-1 Mounting the 10 dBi Antenna Table D-1 Specifications 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Mechanical I Size I Mounting method Cable I Type I Length I Color Connector1 Electrical I Frequency Range I VSWR I Nominal Impedance I Gain I Polarization Antenna Environment I Operating Temperature I Wind/survival (mph) 91.4 cm (36 in.) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in.) and 51 mm (2.0 in.) RG-303, 50 ohm low-loss coax 25 cm (10 in.) Tan Standard-N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 Nominal 50 Ohms 10 dBi Linear Vertical
+60C (140F) - 40C (-40F) At least 240 km/h (150 mph)2 1 2 See Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 At least 200 km/h (124 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in.) ice. D-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure D-2 Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide D-3 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure D-3 Elevation Plane (Vertical) D-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications The Lucent Technologies 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna is for the 2.4 GHz frequency band is a perfect match between the features of the:
I Directional Antennas described in Appendix B 14 dBi Directional Antenna and Appendix F 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna I Omni-Directional Antennas described in Appendix C 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna and Appendix D 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna. Typically used in combination with ORiNOCO/Central. This antenna can be mounted to an antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2.0 in.). Mounting Instructions
CAUTION:
When selecting an antenna location, please ensure General Precautions are met so as to avoid possible contact with electrical power lines. Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper grounding of the antenna mast. 1. Attach the u-bolts, tube mounting bracket, upper mounting bracket, and lower mounting bracket to the mast and spaced as shown in Figure E-1 on page E-2. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide E-1 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure E-1 Mounting the 12 dBi Wide Angle Antenna 2. Assemble the angle adjustment brackets to the upper mounting bracket with 1/2 bolts, lock washers, flat washers and nuts. 3. Next assemble the angle adjustment brackets and lower mounting brackets to the antenna base plate with 1/2 bolts, lock washers, and nuts. This adjustment is for 0 degree mounting. To adjust from 0 to -20 degrees, loosen the hardware at both ends of the angle adjustment bracket and slide it in the slot to the preferred angle. 4. Tighten hardware securely. The U-bolts should be tightened to 9 Nm (7 ft.-
lbs). 5. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6 to connect the antenna to the indoor equipment and seal the antenna connectors. E-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications Table E-1 Specifications 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Mechanical I Size (LxWxD) I Mounting method Connector1 Electrical I Frequency Range I VSWR I Nominal Impedance I Gain I Polarization Half-Power Beamwidth 181x53.7x76 cm (21.1x7.1x3.0 in.)) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 35 mm (1.4 in.) and 51 mm (2.0 in.) Standard-N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 Nominal 50 Ohms 12 dBi Linear Vertical I Elevation Plane (vertical) 13 Degrees I Azimuth Plane 125 Degrees
(horizontal) Antenna Environment I Operating Temperature I Wind/survival (mph)
+60C (140F) - 40C (-40F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 1 2 See Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in.) ice. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide E-3 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure E-2 Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) E-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure E-3 Elevation Plane (Vertical) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide E-5 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications The Lucent Technologies 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is a broadband antenna for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. The grid-type antenna that allows for either horizontal or vertical mounting on a antenna mast with an outside diameter of up to 51 mm (2 in). For detailed specifications see Table F-1 on page F-5. This antenna is typically used in combination with ORiNOCO Outdoor Routers in Remote slave Mode.
! WARNING:
The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is not allowed in countries that adhere to the ETSI radio regulations, France and Japan. In countries that adhere to the FCC regulations, use of this antenna is only allowed when operated with specific ORiNOCO radio channels that can be set at the ORiNOCO/Outdoor Router. Appendix G Certified Outdoor Solutions describes which channels are allowed or not. Prior to purchasing or installing the 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna, please consult Certified Outdoor Solutions on page G-1 for more information. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide F-1 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications Kit Contents The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna comes in two boxes with the following contents:
PACKED IN FEED BOX:
I 1 Feed assembly I 1 Sub-reflector I 1 #6 x 1/2 stainless screw I 2 Stainless 1/4 x 20 hex nuts I 2 Stainless lock washers I 2 Stainless carriage bolts PACKED IN REFLECTOR BOX I 2 Reflector halves I 2 Stainless U-bolts I 2 Mast clamps I 1 Mounting L shaped bracket I 4 Keps nuts (4) #8-32 machine screws I 6 Stainless 1/4 x 20 hex nuts I 6 Stainless lock washers I 2 Stainless carriage bolts I 1 Stainless flat plate washer NOTE:
Prior to installation, or climbing the roof, verify if all parts and components are included. If any part is missing or appears to be damaged, please consult your authorized Lucent Technologies Reseller. Assembling the Antenna 1. Assemble the two halves inserting the 4 #8-32 machine screws through the front. Secure with the keps nuts on the back. NOTE:
Loosely tighten all hardware until completely assembled and then tighten securely. F-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure F-1 Assemble the Reflector 2. Place the sub-reflector on the front of the feed and secure with the #6 x 1/
2stainless screw. 3. Determine the polarity of the antenna (see Figure F-2). I Horizontal Polarity, (the reflector ribs and the sub reflector at the front I end of the antenna are aligned horizontally). Vertical Polarity: (the reflector ribs and the sub reflector at the front end of the antenna are aligned vertically). Figure F-2 Determine Polarization Polarity of the antenna must always be the same as the polarity of the antenna on the opposite side of the link!
4. Place the L bracket on the back of the antenna. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide F-3 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications 5. Insert two carriage bolts from the front to attach. Figure F-3 Attach the mounting Bracket 6. Secure on the back with the lock washers and nuts as pictured in Figure F-3). 7. Re-check the dipole feed assembly for the proper polarity. 8. Attach the feed on the front with 2 carriage bolts. Secure on the back with the lock washers and nuts. Mounting the Antenna
DANGER:
Installation of antenna near power lines is dangerous! Before you proceed, make sure you have read and understood the safety precautions as described in Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation. 1. Before climbing the roof, make sure you have:
I I The assembled antenna The U-bolts and mast clamps to mount the grid antenna to the mast. 2. Determine the desired alignment of the antenna:
I I For horizontal alignment you will need both U-bolts and the 4 lock washers and nuts. For tilted alignment, you will only use a single U-bolt and two lock washers and nuts. This mounting method allows you to mount the antenna with an elevation in 100 degree increments F-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications
! WARNING:
Tilted alignment is not suitable for environments where the antenna is subject to high wind conditions. 3. Place the U-bolt(s) around the mast as pictured in Figure F-3 on page F-4. 4. Slide the mast clamps over the U-bolts as pictured in Figure F-3 on page F-4. 5. Finally slide the L-Bracket over the U-bolts, and fasten the grid antenna to the U-bolts using the lock washers and nuts. For tilted elevation mounting, use the flat plate washer on the adjustable tilt slot to mount and secure the antenna to the desired elevation angle. 6. Proceed with Connecting the Antenna Cable on page 4-6 to connect the antenna to the indoor equipment and seal the antenna connectors. Table F-1 Specifications 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Mechanical I Size (HxWxD) I Mounting method Cable I Type I Length I Color Connector1 Electrical I Frequency Range I VSWR I Nominal Impedance I Gain I Polarization 61,0x91,4x38,1 cm (24x36x15 in.) Clamps to vertical mast with outside diameter between 26 mm (1.102 in.) and 51 mm (2.0 in.) RG-8A/U, 50 ohm low-loss coax 60 cm (24 in.) Black Standard-N (female) 2.4 GHz Less than 2:1 Nominal 50 Ohms 24 dBi I Linear Vertical for standard mounting I Horizontal when mounted differently (see Mounting the Antenna on page F-4) Half-Power Beamwidth (at vertical polarization) I Elevation Plane (vertical) 10 Degrees I Azimuth Plane (horizontal) 6.5 Degrees Antenna Environment I Operating Temperature I Wind/survival (mph)
+60C (140F) - 40C (-40F) At least 200 km/h (124 mph)2 1 2 See Selecting the Correct Connector-Type on page A-2 At least 100 km/h (62 mph) with 1.25 cm (0.5 in.) ice. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide F-5 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure F-4 Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) F-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Hardware Specifications Figure F-5 Elevation Plane (Vertical) ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide F-7 Certified Outdoor Solutions Introduction As radio regulations differ between the various countries world-wide, not all of the outdoor solutions described in this ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide may be allowed in the country where you plan to install this equipment. Local radio regulations or legislation may impose restrictions on the use of specific combinations of:
I PC Cards and Outdoor Antennas I Low-loss antenna cables and Outdoor Antennas I Radio channels selected at ORiNOCO Outdoor Router devices that are connected to specific Outdoor Antennas. NOTE:
Basic rule for selecting a combination of cards, cables and antennas is that no combination is allowed unless explicitly approved in this ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide. Therefore, always use this Appendix in combination with Chapter 3 Determine Range &
Clearance of this document to:
I I Select the right type of antenna equipment Inform your antenna installer and/or LAN Administrator about the impact of regulatory constraints on their job/activities. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide G-1 Certified Outdoor Solutions Introduction
! WARNING:
At all times, it will be the responsibility of the end-user to ensure that an outdoor antenna installation complies with local radio regulations.1 The end-user must verify that:
I I I The antenna installer is aware of these regulations. The correct type of ORiNOCO card is used to connect the host device to the outdoor antenna installation. The correct type of cables and surge arrester have been used, according to the instructions described in this document. Lucent Technologies and its resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. 1 In case you are not certain about the regulations that apply in your country, consult your local Lucent Technologies Sales Office. G-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Certified Outdoor Solutions Selecting the Right Card & Cables Selecting the Right Card & Cables To comply with local radio regulations, Lucent Technologies offers two types of ORiNOCO Cards, that can be used to connect a Outdoor Router or other computing device to an outdoor antenna installation:
I Standard black-colored ORiNOCO PC Card I Red-colored ORiNOCO Fixed Wireless PC Card Also are the low-loss antenna cables available in various lengths and diameters:
I 6 m (15 ft.) with a diameter of 5 mm (0.2 in.)1 I 6 m (15 ft.) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in.) I 15 m (50 ft.) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in.) I 22 m (75 ft.) with a diameter of 10 mm (0.4 in.) When you order the ORiNOCO outdoor antenna equipment, make sure that you order card & cables that comply with the regulations that apply in your country. In case of doubt, please consult the Lucent Technologies Sales office for more information. FCC Regulated Countries In countries that adhere to the regulations as defined by the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC), you can use the standard black-colored ORiNOCO PC Card in combination with all antennas. However restrictions apply when using the card in combination with the 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna (consult Table G-2 on page G-5 for allowed channel settings). 1 The cable-loss of this cable is equal to the loss of the 15 m (50 ft.) cable. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide G-3 Certified Outdoor Solutions Selecting the Right Card & Cables ETSI Regulated Countries In countries that adhere to the regulations as defined by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), France and Japan, you must select the card-type based upon the antenna and cable that will be used. I The 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna is not allowed in ETSI countries, france or Japan. I For ETSI/France and Japan radio approvals, the various card/cable/antenna combinations have all been certified with the red-colored ORiNOCO Fixed Wireless PC Card. I The only antenna/cable combination that allows for using a black-colored ORiNOCO PC Cards, is the 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna in combination with the 6m (20ft) cable with 5 mm (0.2 in.) diameter, or the 15 m (50ft.) or 25 m (75 ft.) cables. Consult Table G-3 on page G-6 for allowed combinations. G-4 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Table G-1 Certified Cable/Antenna Combinations FCC Antenna Antenna Cable type 6m (20 ft.) 5 mm (0.4 in.) 6m (20 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) 15m (50 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) 25m (75 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna1 1 Consult Table G-2 for restrictions on channel selection NA NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Table G-2 Certified Channel/Antenna Combinations FCC Antenna 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 8 Frequency Channels 4 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 10 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes No i O R N O C O O u t d o o r A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e G
5 C e r t i f i e d O u t d o o r S o u t i o n s l l S e e c t i n g t h e R g h i t C a r d
C a b e s l G
6 Table G-3 Certified Cable/Antenna Combinations ETSI Antenna Antenna Cable type 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna 6m (20 ft.) 5 mm (0.2 in.) Yes (black card) Yes Yes Yes No 6m (20 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) Yes Yes Yes No No 15m (50 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) Yes (black card) 25m (75 ft.) 10 mm (0.4 in.) Yes (black card) Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Table G-4 Certified Channel/Antenna Combinations ETSI Antenna 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna 14 dBi Directional Antenna 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna Frequency Channels 9 8 6 7 5 4 3 2 13 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No 12 10 11 NOTE:
All solutions listed in the tables above are based on combinations using the ORiNOCO Fixed Wireless PC Card (red antenna cap), unless indicated otherwise. i O R N O C O O u t d o o r A n t e n n a I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e C e r t i f i e d O u t d o o r S o u t i o n s l l S e e c t i n g t h e R g h i t C a r d
C a b e s l Certified Outdoor Solutions Regulatory Information Regulatory Information The Lucent Technologies outdoor antenna solution must be installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions as described in this ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide. For country-specific approvals, please consult the flyer "Information to the User"
that was shipped with your ORiNOCO PC Card. Please Note:
Radio approvals for the Lucent Technologies outdoor antenna solution are valid only when using the exact combination of Lucent Technologies PC Cards, outdoor antenna cabling components and antennas as listed in this ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide. Using other combinations of parts and components in outdoor antenna solutions will void the radio type approval and may be in violation of local radio regulations. Lucent Technologies and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide G-7 Support & Warranty Technical Support If you encounter problems when installing or using this product, please consult the ORiNOCO website at: http://www.lucent.com/orinoco for:
I the latest software, user documentation and product updates I the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Alternatively please contact your local authorized ORiNOCO reseller for Technical Support. Help us helping you by completing the ORiNOCO problem report form and include it with your e-mail or fax when contacting Technical Support. You can find the problem report form (report.txt) on:
I the ORiNOCO CD-ROM, and I the support pages of the ORiNOCO website. Addresses of authorized ORiNOCO resellers are listed in the Contact &
Ordering section of the ORiNOCO website. Support & Warranty Warranty and Repair Warranty and Repair If it appears that your unit needs a repair or replacement, return to your Dealer/
Distributor in its original packaging. When returning a defective product for Warranty, always include the following documents:
I The Warranty Repair card (last page of this appendix), and I A copy of the invoice/proof of purchase I Problem Report Form (see Technical Support on page H-1). Lucent Technologies extends a limited warranty from date of purchase of:
I Thirty-six (36) months for ORiNOCO hardware products I Twelve (12) months for the ORiNOCO Access Points and Outdoor Routers I Twelve (12) months for the media on which the software is furnished and the reproduction of the software on the media. Upon proof-of-purchase Lucent Technologies shall at its option, repair or replace the defective item at no cost to the buyer. Defective items shall be returned to the dealer/distributor:
I Freight prepaid. I Accompanied by a copy of proof-of-purchase. I Accompanied by a filled out Warranty/Repair card. This warranty is contingent upon proper use in the application for which the products are intended and does not cover products which have been modified without the sellers approval or which have been subjected to unusual physical or electrical demands or damaged in any way. This Warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of any buyer or sellers equipment and the sole and exclusive liability of Lucent Technologies in connection with the products and is in lieu of all other warranties, express, implied or statutory, including, but not limited to, any implied warranty of merchantability of fitness for a particular use and all other obligations or liabilities of Lucent Technologies. In no event will Lucent Technologies Inc. or any other party or person be liable to you or anyone else for any damages, including lost profits, lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages, or inability to use the software provided on the software media even if Lucent Technologies or the other party person has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Support & Warranty Warranty and Repair Support & Warranty Warranty and Repair To be filled out by the User:
To be filled out by the Dealer/
Distributor:
Product Description:
COMCODE (Product ID):
Serial Number:
Invoice Date: (dd/mm/yyyy) Name:
Title:
Company:
Address:
City/State/Zipcode:
Country:
Telephone:
Fax:
Email:
Dealer Name:
Address:
City/State/Zipcode:
Country:
Telephone:
Fax:
Warranty Yes No Comment Return Approval Reference:
Reported Problem:
Problem Description:
Out-of-Box Failure Other ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide H-4 Index A Antenna alignment 2-12 cable A-9 cable routing 2-14 connecting 4-6 connectors C-3 mounting 4-5 mounting directional B-1 mounting omni-directional C-1 placement 2-8 Antenna Cable 15 m (50 ft) A-10 22m (75 ft) A-10 6 m (20 ft) A-9 routing 2-6 sealing connectors 4-7 Antenna Mast grounding 2-12 placement 2-11 requirements 2-11 wall (side) mount 2-11 Antenna Radiation Patterns B-5, B-6, C-4, C-5, D-3, D-4, E-4, E-5, F-6, F-7 Antenna, polarization 2-13 Azimuth Plane B-5, C-4 C Cable Assembly, specifications A-6 Cable Factor 3-7 Check-List 2-15 Clearance 3-9 areas with obstacles 3-10 dense urban areas 3-10 determine 3-1 line-of-sight 2-10 open areas 3-10 Clearance Factor 3-8 Connector antenna B-4 Connectors antenna cable A-9 Surge Arrester A-8 D Diagnostics OR Manager 2-12 E Elevation Plane B-6, C-5, D-4, E-5, F-7 F Fresnel Zone 3-9 G Gain 3-1 Grounding System 2-12 H Horizontal Plane, see Azimuth Plane B-5, C-4, D-3, E-4, F-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide IX-1 calculating 3-2 Clearance Factor 3-8 Remote Link Test see Wireless Link Test 2-12 Remote Outdoor Router 1-4 RF Obstacles 2-9 S Safety, precautions 4-1 Sealing 4-7 Sensitivity 3-1 Specifications 15m (50 ft) cable A-10 22m (75 ft) cable A-10 6m (20 ft) cable A-9 cable assembly A-6 Surge Arrester A-8 Surge Arrester placement 2-5 V Vertical Plane, see Elevation Plane B-6, C-5, D-4, E-5, F-7 Index I Information, diskettes 1-3 Information, finding additional 1-2 Installation, overview outdoor 2-8 Installation, site prerequisites 2-1 L Lightning Protector see Surge Arrester 2-5 specifications A-8 M Mounting directional antenna B-1 O OR Manager tool 2-12 Users Guide 2-12 Wireless Link Test 2-13 ORiNOCO Surge Arrester A-7 Outdoor Router hardware 2-3 hardware installation 2-5 placement 2-3 Output Power 3-1 P Performance seasonal factors 2-10 weather conditions 2-10 Point-to-Point 1-4 R Range 3-2 Cable Factor 3-7 IX-2 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide List of Figures Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure A-1 Figure B-1 Figure B-2 Figure B-3 Figure B-4 Figure C-1 Figure C-2 Figure C-3 Figure D-1 Figure D-2 Figure D-3 Figure E-1 Figure E-2 Figure E-3 Figure F-1 Figure F-2 Figure F-3 Figure F-4 Figure F-5 ORiNOCO Point-to-Point Link ORiNOCO Point-to-Multipoint Link Overview Indoor Installation of the Outdoor Router Overview Indoor Installation Outdoor Router Client Potential Obstacles for a Directional Antenna OR Manager Wireless Link Test Fresnel Zone Clearance Factor Diagram Calculating the Point-to-Point Range Calculating the Point-to-Multipoint Range Mounting the ORiNOCO Surge Arrester Mounting the 14 dBi Antenna to a Mast Mounting the 14 dBi Antenna to a Wall Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) Elevation Plane (Vertical) Mounting the 7 dBi Antenna to a Mast Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) Elevation Plane (Vertical) Mounting the 10 dBi Antenna Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) Elevation Plane (Vertical) Mounting the 12 dBi Wide Angle Antenna Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) Elevation Plane (Vertical) Assemble the Reflector Determine Polarization Attach the mounting Bracket Azimuth Plane (Horizontal) Elevation Plane (Vertical) 1-4 1-5 2-2 2-4 2-9 2-13 3-9 3-11 3-13 3-16 A-7 B-2 B-3 B-5 B-6 C-2 C-4 C-5 D-2 D-3 D-4 E-2 E-4 E-5 F-3 F-3 F-4 F-6 F-7 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide LOF-1 List of Tables Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table A-1 Table A-2 Table A-3 Table A-4 Table A-5 Table A-6 Table A-7 Table B-1 Table C-1 Table D-1 Table E-1 Table F-1 Table G-1 Table G-2 Table G-3 Table G-4 3-5 Maximum Outdoor Range for FCC Products 3-6 Maximum Range for ETSI/FR/JP Products 3-7 Calculate the Cable Factor 3-12 FCC Outdoor Range with 10 m (33 ft.) Clearance A-3 Standard N-Type Connector Diagram A-4 Reverse Polarity-N Cabling Diagram A-6 Specifications Cable Assembly A-8 Specifications Surge Arrester A-9 Specifications 6m (20 ft) Antenna Cable. A-10 Specifications 15m (50 ft) Antenna Cable A-10 Specifications 22m (75 ft) Antenna Cable Specifications 14 dBi Directional Antenna B-4 Specifications 7 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna C-3 Specifications 10 dBi Omni-Directional Base Station Antenna D-2 Specifications 12 dBi Directional Wide Angle Antenna E-3 F-5 Specifications 24 dBi Directional Parabolic Grid Antenna G-5 Certified Cable/Antenna Combinations FCC G-5 Certified Channel/Antenna Combinations FCC G-6 Certified Cable/Antenna Combinations ETSI Certified Channel/Antenna Combinations ETSI G-6 ORiNOCO Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide LOT-1
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2004-03-05 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2003-03-03 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
3 | 2003-01-06 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2004-03-05
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2003-03-03
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
2003-01-06
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Proxim Wireless Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005850607
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
47633 Westinghouse Drive
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Fremont, California 94539
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@americantcb.com
|
||||
1 2 3 |
h******@americanTCB.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
HZB
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
B11FNF
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
C******** v********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Sr. Regulatory and Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
c******@proxim.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
LXE, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Advance Data Technology
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Advance Data Technology Corporation
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
C******** A**** B******
|
||||
1 2 3 |
E****** L****
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
125 Technology Parkway
|
||||
1 2 3 |
81-1 Luliaoken, 9th Lin, Wulng Tsuen Chiunglin
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
81-1, Luliaoken, 9th Lin, Wullung Tsuen
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
926000
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Norcross, Georgia 30092
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Hsinchu, 307
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
(770)******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 |
+886-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
+886 ********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
(770)********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
+886-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
+886 ********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
b******@lxe.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
e******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless LAN Access Point | ||||
1 2 3 | mini-PCI Card Model B11FNF | |||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Limited Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is Conducted. Limited Modular Approval (LMA) specific to model Alpha-1 wireless access point. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
LXE Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
C******** B****
|
||||
1 2 3 |
T**** W****
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
R****** C******
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
770-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 |
886-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
770-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
886-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
b******@ems-t.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
t******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0340000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0340000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0340000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC